+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s...

Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s...

Date post: 20-Jul-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 0 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
198
Projector PH1202HL1 User’s Manual Model No. NP-PH1202HL1
Transcript
Page 1: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

Projector

PH1202HL1User’s Manual

Model No.NP-PH1202HL1

Page 2: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

Ver. 1 12/15

• Apple,Mac,MacOSX,andMacBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.

• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista, InternetExplorer, .NETFrameworkandPowerPointareeitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.

• Adobe,AdobePDF,AdobeReader,andAcrobatareeitherregisteredtrademarksortrademarksofAdobeSystemsIncorporatedintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.

• HDMI,theHDMILogoandHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterfacearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMILicensingLLC.

• DisplayPortandDisplayPortComplianceLogoaretrademarksownedbytheVideoElectronicsStandardsAssocia-tion.

• HDBaseT™isatrademarkofHDBaseTAlliance.

• DLPisatrademarkofTexasInstruments.

• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandothercountriesandareas.

• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation

• CRESTRONandROOMVIEWareregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectronics,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandothercountries.

• EthernetiseitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofFujiXeroxCo.,Ltd.

• Otherproductsandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrade-marksoftheirrespectiveholders.

• TOPPERSSoftwareLicenses

TheproductincludessoftwarelicensedunderTOPPERSLicense.

Formoreinformationoneachsoftware,see“readme_English.pdf”insidethe“aboutTOPPERS”folderonthesup-pliedCD-ROM.

NOTES(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.

(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionablepoints,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.

(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprofitorothermattersdeemedtoresultfromusingtheProjector.

Page 3: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

i

Important InformationSafety CautionsPrecautionsPleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.

CAUTIONToturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasilyaccessible.

CAUTIONTOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.

Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufficienttocauseelectricalshock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.

Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthisunithasbeenprovided.Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.

WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.

DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)ThisClassAdigitalapparatusmeetsallrequirementsoftheCanadianICES-003Standards.

WARNINGThisisaClassAproduct.Inadomesticenvironmentthisproductmaycauseradiointerferenceinwhichcasetheusermayberequiredtotakeadequatemeasures.

CAUTION• Inordertoreduceanyinterferencewithradioandtelevisionreceptionuseasignalcablewithferritecoreattached.Useofsignalcableswithoutaferritecoreattachedmaycauseinterferencewithradioandtelevisionreception.• ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassAdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferencewhentheequipmentisoperatedinacommercialenvironment.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,andcanradi-ateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstallationmanual,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.Operationofthisequipmentinaresidentialareaislikelytocauseharmfulinterferenceinwhichcasetheuserwillberequiredtocorrecttheinterferenceathisownexpense

Page 4: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

ii

Important Information

WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCaliforniatocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASHHANDSAFTERHANDLING.

Important SafeguardsThesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventfireandshock.Pleasereadthemcarefullyandheedallwarnings.

Installation• Consultyourdealerforinformationabouttransportingandinstallingtheprojector.Donotattempttotransportandinstalltheprojectoryourself.Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperop-erationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.• Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:- onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.- nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.- indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.- inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.- onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.• Donotinstallandstoretheprojectorinthebelowcircumstances.Failuretodosomaycauseofmalfunction.- Inpowerfulmagneticfields- Incorrosivegasenvironment- Outdoors• Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:- Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.- Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.- Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.- Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

Page 5: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

iii

Important Information

WARNING• Donotcoverthelenswiththelenscaporequivalentwhiletheprojectorison.Doingsocanleadtomeltingofthecapduetotheheatemittedfromthelightoutput.

• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.

Donotusetheprojectorwithitleaningtotheleftandright.Thismayresultinamalfunction,however,portraitinstal-lation* ispossible.Pleasereadthewarningsconcerningportraitorientationbeforesettingtheprojector inportraitorientation.(→page140)

Fire and Shock Precautions • Ensurethatthereissufficientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyourprojector.Allowenoughspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.(→pageix)• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieveanyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyourprojector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnel.• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorfire.• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof200-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupplyfitsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.• Donotlookintothelightsourceusingopticalinstruments(suchasmagnifyingglassesandmirrors).Visualimpair-mentcouldresult.• Donotusethemalfunctionedprojector.Itmaycauseofnotonlyelectricshockorfirebutalsoseriousdamagetoyoureyesight.• Ifdamageormalfunctionoftheprojectorisfound,immediatelystoptouseitandconsultyourdealerforrepair.• Neverdisassemble,repair,andremodelbyendusers.Iftheseareperformedbyendusers,itmaycauseofseriousproblemonusers'safety.• Consultyourdealerfordisposingtheprojector.Neverdisassembletheprojectorbeforedisposingit.

Page 6: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

iv

Important Information

• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorfire.- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.- Donotheatthepowercord.- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnelunderthefollowingconditions:- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.• Movingtheprojectorrequiresfourpeopleormore.Besuretofirmlygripthefrontandbackhandles,thenmovetheprojector.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinet.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.• WhenusingaLANcable: Forsafety,donotconnecttotheterminalforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.

CAUTION• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhilethelensshiftisinoperation.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbetweenthecabinetandlenscover.• Donotusetheleveladjusterforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.• Ifasafetycover(soldseparately)isused,donotcarrytheprojectorbythecover.Thesafetycovercancomeoffandtheprojectormaybedropped,causingpersonalinjury.• Donotunplugthepowercordfromthewalloutletorprojectorwhentheprojectorispoweredon.DoingsocancausedamagetotheACINterminaloftheprojectorand(or)theprongplugofthepowercord. ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,usetheprojector’smainpowerswitch,apowerstripequippedwithaswitch,orabreaker.

Precautions when installing or replacing the lens unit sold separately (LENS CALIBRATION)Afterinstallingorreplacingthelensunit,presseithertheLENSCALIBRATIONbuttononthemainunitortheINFO/L-CALIB.buttonwhilepressingtheCTLbuttonontheremotecontroltocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION].(→page16,106)Bycarryingout[LENSCALIBRATION],theadjustmentrangeofthezoomandfocusofthe[LENSMEMORY]iscalibrated.Contactyourdealertoinstallandreplacethelensunit.

Caution on Handling the Optional LensWhenshippingtheprojectorwiththelens,removethelensbeforeshippingtheprojector.Alwaysattachthedustcaptothelenswheneveritisnotmountedontheprojector.Thelensandthelensshiftmechanismmayencounterdamagecausedbyimproperhandlingduringtransportation.Ifyouneedtoremovethelensunit,contactyourdealer.

Page 7: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

v

Important Information

Remote Control Precautions• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Light Module

1. Alightmodulecontainingmultiplelaserdiodesisequippedintheproductasthelightsource.

2. Theselaserdiodesaresealedinthelightmodule.Nomaintenanceorserviceisrequiredfortheperformanceofthelightmodule.

3. Enduserisnotallowedtoreplacethelightmodule.

4. Contactqualifieddistributorforlightmodulereplacementandfurtherinformation.

Laser Safety CautionThisproductsisclassifiedasClass3RofIEC60825-1Secondedition2007-03.AlsocomplieswithFDAperformancestandards21CFR1040.10and1040.11 for laserproductsexceptfordeviationspursuanttoLaserNoticeNo.50,datedJune24,2007.Obeythelawsandregulationsofyourcountryinrelationtotheinstallationandmanagementofthedevice.

CAUTION

• Useofcontrolsoradjustmentsorperformanceofproceduresotherthanthosespecifiedhereinmayresultinhazardousradiationexposure.

CAUTION – CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT

LASERLIGHT–AVOIDDIRECTEYEEXPOSURE

• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.

• Keepanyitemssuchasmagnifyingglassoutofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightbeingprojectedfromthelensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancauseunpredictableoutcomesuchasfireorinjurytotheeyes.• Whenturningontheprojector,ensurethatnobodyisfacingtowardsthelensinthepathofthelightemittedfromthelaser.

Page 8: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

vi

Important Information

Laser aperture and warning labels on the projector

Laser aperture

NonaccessibleInternalLaserParametersWavelength 462nmLaserpowerforclassification <220mWTotalinternallaserpower <56WDivergence ±12 - 35°Modeofoperation CWNegativemodulation,duetoframerate 23-192Hz

Page 9: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

vii

Important Information

About High Altitude mode• Usingtheprojectorathighlandscanshortenthelifeofopticalcomponentssuchasthelightmodule.

About Copyright of original projected pictures:Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenuesuchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.

Thisdeviceisnotintendedforuseinthedirectfieldofviewatvisualdisplayworkplaces.Toavoidincommodingreflec-tionsatvisualdisplayworkplacesthisdevicemustnotbeplacedinthedirectfieldofview.

Page 10: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

viii

Important Information

Health precautions to users viewing 3D images

Beforeviewing,besuretoreadhealthcareprecautionsthatmaybefoundintheuser’smanualincludedwithyour3Deyeglassesoryour3DcompatiblecontentsuchasBlu-rayDiscs,videogames,computer’svideofilesandthelike.Toavoidanyadversesymptoms,heedthefollowing:• Donotuse3Deyeglassesforviewinganymaterialotherthan3Dimages.• Allowadistanceof2m/7feetorgreaterbetweenthescreenandauser.Viewing3Dimagesfromtoocloseadistancecanstrainyoureyes.• Avoidviewing3Dimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.Takeabreakof15minutesorlongeraftereveryhourofviewing.• Ifyouoranymemberofyourfamilyhasahistoryoflight-sensitiveseizures,consultadoctorbeforeviewing3Dimages.• Whileviewing3Dimages,ifyougetsicksuchasnausea,dizziness,queasiness,headache,eyestrain,blurryvision,convulsions,andnumbness,stopviewingthem.Ifsymptomsstillpersist,consultadoctor.• View3Dimagesfromthefrontofthescreen.Viewingfromananglemaycausefatigueoreyestrain.

Power management functionInordertokeeppowerconsumptionlow,thefollowingpowermanagementfunctions(1)and(2)havebeensetwhenshippedfromthefactory.Pleasedisplaytheon-screenmenuandchangethesettings(1)and(2)accordingtotheaimofusingtheprojector.

1. STANDBY MODE (Factory preset: NORMAL)

• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],thefollowingterminalsandfunctionswillnotwork:

HDMIOUTterminal,Ethernet/HDBaseTPort,USBPort,LANfunctions,MailAlertfunction

(→page122)

2. AUTO POWER OFF (Factory preset: 1 hour)

• When[1:00]isselectedfor[AUTOPOWEROFF],youcanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoffin1hourifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

(→page123)

Page 11: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

ix

Important Information

Clearance for Installing the ProjectorAllowampleclearancebetweentheprojectoranditssurroundingsasshownbelow.Thehightemperatureexhaustcomingoutofthedevicemaybesuckedintothedeviceagain.AvoidinstallingtheprojectorinaplacewhereairmovementfromtheHVACisdirectedattheprojector.HeatedairfromtheHVACcanbetakeninbytheprojector'sintakevent.Ifthishappens,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillrisetoohighcausingtheover-temperatureprotectortoautomaticallyturnofftheprojectorspower.• Beforesettingtheprojectorinportraitorientation,pleasereadpage140,Portraitprojection(verticalorientation).

Example 1 – If there are walls on both sides of the projector.

30cm/11.8"orgreater 30cm/11.8"orgreater

IntakeventIntakevent

NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the front, back, and top of the projector.

Example 2 – If there is a wall behind the projector.(1) For floor installation:

70cm/27.6"orgreater

Lens

Exhaustvent

NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the back, right, left, and top of the projector.

(2) For ceiling mounting:

30cm/12"orgreater

70cm/27.6"orgreater

Lens

NOTE:1. The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the front, right, left, back, and bottom of the projector.2. If suspending the projector within the range of 30 cm/12 inches away from the ceiling, allow ample clearance for all four sides

and the under the projector.

Page 12: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

x

Table of ContentsImportant Information ............................................................................................ i

1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................1❶What’sintheBox? ..........................................................................................................1❷IntroductiontotheProjector ...........................................................................................2

CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ..................................................2General .....................................................................................................................2Lightsource·Brightness ..........................................................................................2Installation .................................................................................................................2Videos .......................................................................................................................3Network .....................................................................................................................3Energy-saving ...........................................................................................................3Aboutthisuser’smanual ...........................................................................................4

❸PartNamesoftheProjector ...........................................................................................5Front/Top ...................................................................................................................5Rear ..........................................................................................................................6Controls/IndicatorPanel ............................................................................................7TerminalsFeatures ...................................................................................................8

❹PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ................................................................................9BatteryInstallation ..................................................................................................10RemoteControlPrecautions ...................................................................................10OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl .......................................................11UsingtheRemoteControlinWiredOperation ........................................................11

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ...............................................12❶FlowofProjectinganImage .........................................................................................12❷ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ..............................................13

UsingthePowerCordFixingMetal .........................................................................14❸TurningontheProjector ...............................................................................................15

PerformingLensCalibration ...................................................................................16NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) .......................................17

❹SelectingaSource .......................................................................................................18Selectingthecomputerorvideosource..................................................................18

❺AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ........................................................................20Adjustmentoftheprojector’ssettings(Leveladjusters) ..........................................21Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) .............................22Focus ......................................................................................................................24Zoom .......................................................................................................................24

❻OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ..................................................................25AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust ...................................................................25

❼TurningofftheProjector ...............................................................................................26

3. Convenient Features ......................................................................................28❶Stoppingprojection .......................................................................................................28❷Turningoffthelightsource ...........................................................................................28❸Lockingtheprojectorsoitcannotbeoperated .............................................................28❹MutingtheImage(AVMute) .........................................................................................29❺TurningOfftheOn-ScreenMenu(On-ScreenMute) ....................................................29

Page 13: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

xi

Table of Contents

❻FreezingaPicture ........................................................................................................29❼MagnifyingaPicture .....................................................................................................30❽ChangingLIGHTMODE/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingLIGHTMODE

[LIGHTMODE]........................................................................................................31CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ..............................................33

❾CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] .................34❿ PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] .......................................37⓫Projecting3Dvideos.....................................................................................................40

Proceduretowatch3Dvideosusingthisprojector .................................................40Whenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D .....................................................................42

⓬ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ..................................................43⓭StoringChangesforLensShift,Zoom,andFocus[LENSMEMORY] .........................49

UsageExample.......................................................................................................49Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]: .......................................49Tocallupyouradjustedvaluesfrom[REF.LENSMEMORY]: ................................51

4. Multi-Screen Projection ...............................................................................54❶Thingsthatcanbedoneusingmulti-screenprojection ................................................54

Case1.Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideos[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] .........................................................................................................54Case2.Usingfourprojectors(resolution:FULLHD)toprojectvideoswitharesolutionof3840×2160pixels[TILING]...............................................................55Thingstonotewheninstallingprojectors ................................................................57

❷DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime ...................................................................58Projectingtwoscreens ............................................................................................59Switchingthemaindisplaywiththesub-displayandviceversa .............................60Restrictions .............................................................................................................61

❸DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING] ...........................................................62Settingtheoverlapofprojectionscreens ................................................................63BlackLevelAdjustment ...........................................................................................66

5. Using On-Screen Menu .................................................................................68❶UsingtheMenus ...........................................................................................................68

MenuElements .......................................................................................................69❷ListofMenuItems ........................................................................................................70❸MenuDescriptions&Functions[INPUT] ......................................................................76

HDMI .......................................................................................................................76DisplayPort ..............................................................................................................76BNC ........................................................................................................................76BNC(CV) .................................................................................................................76BNC(Y/C) ................................................................................................................76COMPUTER ...........................................................................................................76HDBaseT ................................................................................................................76SLOT .......................................................................................................................76ENTRYLIST ...........................................................................................................76TESTPATTERN ......................................................................................................76

❹MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] ...................................................................80[PICTURE] ..............................................................................................................80[IMAGEOPTIONS] .................................................................................................84

Page 14: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

xii

Table of Contents

[VIDEO] ...................................................................................................................88[3DSETTINGS] ......................................................................................................90UsingtheLensMemoryFunction[LENSMEMORY] ..............................................91

❺MenuDescriptions&Functions[DISPLAY] ..................................................................92[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] .................................................................................92[GEOMETRICCORRECTION] ...............................................................................94[EDGEBLENDING] ................................................................................................98[MULTISCREEN]....................................................................................................99

❻MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] ...................................................................101[MENU] .................................................................................................................101[INSTALLATION] ...................................................................................................103[CONTROL] ..........................................................................................................107[NETWORKSETTINGS] .......................................................................................115[SOURCEOPTIONS] ...........................................................................................120[POWEROPTIONS] .............................................................................................122ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ..................................................................124

❼MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .....................................................................125[USAGETIME] ......................................................................................................125[SOURCE(1)] ........................................................................................................125[SOURCE(2)] ........................................................................................................126[SOURCE(3)] ........................................................................................................126[SOURCE(4)] ........................................................................................................126[WIREDLAN] ........................................................................................................127[VERSION(1)] .......................................................................................................127[VERSION(2)] .......................................................................................................127[OTHERS] .............................................................................................................128[CONDITIONS] .....................................................................................................128[HDBaseT] ............................................................................................................128

6. Connecting to Other Equipment ...........................................................129❶Connectingacomputer ..............................................................................................129

AnalogRGBsignalconnection .............................................................................129DigitalRGBsignalconnection ..............................................................................130

❷ConnectinganExternalMonitor .................................................................................133❸ConnectingYourBlu-rayPlayerorOtherAVEquipment ............................................134

ConnectingComponentInput ...............................................................................135ConnectingHDMIInput.........................................................................................136

❹Connectingadocumentcamera .................................................................................137❺ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ........................................................................................138❻ConnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice(soldcommercially) .........................139❼Portraitprojection(verticalorientation) .......................................................................140

7. Maintenance .....................................................................................................142❶CleaningtheFilters.....................................................................................................142❷CleaningtheProtectionglass .....................................................................................146❸CleaningtheCabinet ..................................................................................................146

8. User Supportware ..........................................................................................147❶OperatingEnvironmentforUserSupportware ...........................................................147

Page 15: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

xiii

Table of Contents

Downloadservice .................................................................................................147OperatingEnvironment .........................................................................................147

❷InstallingSoftwareProgram .......................................................................................148InstallationforWindowssoftware ..........................................................................148

❸OperatingtheProjectorViatheLAN(VirtualRemoteTool) ........................................150ConnecttheprojectortoaLAN. ............................................................................151

❹ ControllingtheProjectoroveraLAN(PCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5) ........................... 153

9. Appendix ..............................................................................................................156❶Throwdistanceandscreensize .................................................................................156

Lenstypesandthrowdistance .............................................................................156Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions ................................................................157Lensshiftingrange ................................................................................................158

❷MountingtheOptionalBoard(soldseparately) ..........................................................159❸CompatibleInputSignalList .......................................................................................161❹Specifications .............................................................................................................164❺CabinetDimensions ...................................................................................................167❻Pinassignmentsandsignalnamesofmainterminals ...............................................169❼Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................175

IndicatorMessages ...............................................................................................175CommonProblems&Solutions ............................................................................177Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. ...............................179

❽PCControlCodesandCableConnection ..................................................................180❾TroubleshootingCheckList .........................................................................................181

Page 16: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

1

1. Introduction❶ What’s in the Box?Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.

Projector

* Theprojectorisshippedwithoutalens.Forthetypesoflensandthrowdistances,seepage156.

Remotecontrol(7N901041)

AAalkalinebatteries(x2)

Powercord(US:7N080244)

Servicekeys(2)(24C09081)WARNING:Usedbytheservicetechnician.Donotattempttousebyyourselfasthisisdangerous.

Glassprotectorcap

• ImportantInfomation(7N8N6771)

• QuickSetupGuide(ForNorthAmerica:7N8N6781)

• SecuritySticker (Usethisstickerwhensecurity

passwordisseton.)• Limitedwarranty

NECProjectorCD-ROMUser’smanual(PDF)(7N952401)

Page 17: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

2

1. Introduction

❷ Introduction to the ProjectorThissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.

Congratulations on Your Purchase of the ProjectorThisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimagesupto500inchesacross(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCorMaccomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,Blu-rayplayer,ordocumentcamera.Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*1.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.

*1 Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.

Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.

Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

General

• Three-chipsDLPprojectorwithhighresolutionandhighbrightness

Realizedtoprojecttheimageintheresolution1920×1080pixels(FullHD),theaspectratioin16:9,andthebrightnessin12000lm.AbletoprojectFullHDimageinNativeresolution.

• Superiordust-proofstructure

Adaptedthecyclecoolingsystemforcoolingdowntheopticalparts.Bythissystem,airinthelightsourceiscooleddownandcirculated.Astheresult,theopticalpartsarenotexposedtotheopenairandenabletokeepbrightnesswithoutcontaminationbydust.

* Cannotpreventcontaminationbydustcompletely.

Light source · Brightness

• Along-lifelaserdiodeisequippedinthelightmodule

Theproductcanbeoperatedatlowcostbecausethelaserlightsourcecanbeusedforalongtimewithoutrequir-ingreplacementormaintenance.

Moreover,ifthelightmodulelifeoptimizing[LONGLIFE]modeisselected,lightmodulelifecanbeextended.

• Brightnesscanbeadjustedwithinawiderange

Unlikewithordinarylightsources,thebrightnesscanbeadjustedfrom30to100%in1%increments.

• [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode

Brightnessnormallydecreaseswithuse,butbyselecting[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode,sensorsinsidetheprojectordetectandautomaticallyadjusttheoutput,therebymaintainingconstantbrightnessthroughoutthelifeofthelightmodule.

However,ifbrightnessoutputissetatthemaximum,brightnesswilldecreasewithuse.

Installation

• Widerangeofoptionallensesselectableaccordingtotheplaceofinstallation

Thisprojectorsupports4typesofoptionallenses,providingaselectionoflensesadaptedtoavarietyofplacesofinstallationandprojectionmethods.Nolensismountedatshippingfromthefactory.Contactyourdealerforpurchasingandreplacingtheseoptionallensessoldseparately.

• Tilt-free,portraitprojection

Thisprojectorcanbesettoanyanglewithinavertical360°range.

Itcanalsorotatethepicture90° intoportraitorientation,however, itcannotbeinstalledwithrightor leftslantbesidestheportraitprojection.

• Powerlenscontrolforquickandeasyadjustment

Byusingbuttonsontheprojectorortheremotecontrol,zoom,focus,andposition(lensshift)canbeadjusted.

Page 18: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

3

1. Introduction

Videos

• Widerangeofinput/outputterminals(HDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseT,BNC,etc.)

Theprojectorisequippedwithavarietyofinput/outputterminals:HDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseT,BNC(5-core),computer(analog),etc.

Theprojector’sHDMIinput/outputterminalsandDisplayPortinputterminalsupportHDCP.

HDBaseT,promotedandadvancedbytheHDBaseTAlliance,isaconnectionstandardforhomeappliances.

• Slotforoptionalboard

Thisprojectorhasaslotforoptionalboards(soldseparately).

• Simultaneousdisplayof2images(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE)

Twoimagescanbeprojectedsimultaneouslywithasingleprojector.

Therearetwotypesoflayoutsforthetwoimages:“picture-in-picture”(PIP)inwhichasub-pictureisdisplayedonthemainpicture,and“picture-by-picture”(PICTUREBYPICTURE)inwhichthemainandsubpicturesaredisplayednexttoeachother.

• Multi-screenprojectionusingmultipleprojectors

ThisprojectorisequippedwithmultipleHDMIinput&outputterminalsthatcanconnectmultipleprojectorsinadaisychain.Ahighqualitypictureisachievedbydividingandprojectinghighresolutionvideosamongthevariousprojectors.

Furthermore,theboundariesofthescreensaresmoothedusinganedgeblendingfunction.

• Seamlessswitchfunctionforsmootherscreenchangeswhenswitchingthesignal

Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldsothatthatthenewimagecanbeswitchedtowithoutabreakduetoabsenceofasignal.

• SupportsHDMI3Dformat

Thisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewearand3DemittersthatsupportXpand3D.

Network

• SupportedbywiredLAN

HDBaseT/EthernetPortVideocanbetransmittedfromacomputerequippedwithaRF-45portthatisconnectedtoawiredLANtotheprojector,andtheprojectorcanalsobecontrolledfromthecomputer.

• CRESTRONROOMVIEWcompatible

ThisprojectorsupportsCRESTRONROOMVIEW,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedtothenetworktobeman-agedfromacomputerorcontroller.

Energy-saving

• “LIGHTMODE”forlowpowerconsumptionand“CarbonMeter”display

Theprojectorisequippedwithan“LIGHTMODE”forreducingpowerconsumptionduringuse.Furthermore,thepower-savingeffectwhentheLIGHTMODEissetisconvertedintotheamountofreductionsofCO2emissionsandthisisindicatedontheconfirmationmessagedisplayedwhenthepoweristurnedoffandat“Information”ontheon-screenmenu(CARBONMETER).

Page 19: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4

1. Introduction

About this user’s manualThefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthefirsttime.Takeafewminutesnowtoreviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llfindanoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.

Page 20: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

5

1. Introduction

❸ Part Names of the ProjectorFront/TopThelensissoldseparately.ThedescriptionbelowisforwhentheNP-9LS16ZM1lensismounted.

Lens

Handle

LevelAdjuster(→page21)

Terminals(→page8)

ACINterminalConnectthesuppliedpowercord’s

three-pinplughere,andplugtheotherendintoanactivewalloutlet.

(→page13)

MainpowerswitchWhileACpowerisbeingsupplied,

setthemainpowerswitchtoONposition(|),thenyourprojectorwill

enterastandbystate.

IntakeventTakesinoutsideairtocooltheunit.Thereareairintakeandventilation

holesonthebottom.(→pageix,57,142)

RemoteSensor(locatedonthefrontandtherear)(→page11)

Controls/Indicatorpanel(→page7)

Page 21: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

6

1. Introduction

Rear

IntakeventTakesinoutsideairtocooltheunit.

(→pageix,57,142)

LevelAdjuster(→page21)

RearLED(→page112)

ExhaustventHeatedairisexhaustedfromhere.

RemoteSensor(locatedonthefrontandtherear)(→page11)

Handle

ModelnameModelnameofyourprojectorisindicatedhereonthelabel.

Page 22: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

7

1. Introduction

Controls/Indicator Panel

1. Light button Illuminatesthecontrolpanelandtheindicatorpanel.AvailablewhenthePowerisONandtheHDBaseTstandbyisselectedasstandbymode.

(→page16)

2. (POWER)Button (→page16,26)

3. POWER Indicator (→page15,16,26,175)

4. STATUS Indicator (→page175)

5. LIGHT Indicator (→page28,176)

6. TEMP.Indicator (→page176)

7. SHUTTER Indicator (→page28,176)

8. Liquidcrystalindicatorpanel Theprojectordisplaysitsstatus,inputsignalinfo,anderrorinfowheneverconnectedtoapowersource.

Informationdisplayed Projectorstatus:stand-by(sleep),poweron/off

Input signal info: input terminal, entry list number,sourcename,horizontalfrequency,verticalfrequency

Errorinfo:errorcode,errordescription

9. SHUTTERButton (→page28,105)

10. (light source) button (→page28)

11.MENUButton (→page68)

12. ▲▼◀▶Buttons (→page68)

13.ENTERButton (→page68)

14.EXITButton (→page68)

15.KEYLOCKButton/KEYLOCKIndicator (→page28)

16.LIGHTButton (→page31)

17.SOURCEButton (→page18)

18.AUTOADJ.Button (→page25)

19.3DREFORMButton (→page34,94)

20.LENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONButton (→page22,158)

21.LENSCALIBRATIONButton (→page16,106)

22.FOCUS+/−Button (→page24)

23.ZOOM+/−Button (→page24)

12

671 5 4 3

29

8

10

11

141918

21

23

15

13

1617

20

22

Page 23: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

8

1. Introduction

Terminals Features

1. COMPUTERIN/ComponentInputTerminal(MiniD-Sub15Pin)

(→page13,129,135,169)

2. DisplayPortINTerminal(DisplayPort20Pin) (→page130,169)

3. HDMIINTerminal(TypeA) (→page130,132,136,169)

4. BNCInput[R/Cr/CV,G/Y/Y,B/Cb/C,H,V]Termi-nals(BNC×5)

(→page129,135)

5. BNC(Y/C)InputTerminal(BNC×2) (→page134)

6. BNC(CV)InputTerminal(BNC×1) (→page134)

7. USBPort(TypeA) (→page170) (Forfutureexpansion.Thisportallowsforpowersup-ply.)

8. HDMIOUTTerminal(TypeA) (→page133)

9. Ethernet/HDBaseTPort(RJ-45) (→page138,139,170)

10.3DSYNCTerminal(MiniDIN4Pin) (→page41)

11.3Dterminal(3D)(D-sub15P) Theterminalforconnectinga3Dimagesystemtotheprojector.

12.REMOTETerminal(StereoMini) Usethisjackforwiredremotecontroloftheprojectorusingacommerciallyavailableremotecablewith⌀3.5 stereomini-plug(withoutresistance).

Connecttheprojectorandthesuppliedremotecontrolusingacommerciallyavailablewiredremotecontrolcable.

(→page11)NOTE: • Whenaremotecontrolcable isconnectedtotheREMOTE

terminal, infrared remote control operations cannot be per-formed.

• PowercannotbesuppliedfromtheREMOTEterminaltotheremote control.

• When [HDBaseT] is selected in the [REMOTE SENSOR]and the projector is connected to a commercially-available transmissiondevicethatsupportsHDBaseT,remotecontroloperations in infra-red cannot be carried out if transmission of remote control signals has been set up in the transmission device.However,remotecontrolusinginfraredrayscanbecarried out when the power supply of the transmission device is switched off.

13.Ethernetport(LAN)(RJ-45) Thisterminalisusedforservicepurposeonly.

14.USBport(USB)(typeA) Thisterminalisusedforservicepurposeonly.

15.PCcontrolterminal(RS-232)(D-sub9P) TheterminalforoperatingtheprojectorfromaPCviaanRS-232Corforservicepersonneltosetdatafortheprojector.

ConnecttheprojectorandthePCwithacommerciallyavailableRS-232Cstraightcable.

16.Externalcontrolterminal(GPI/O)(D-sub37P) Theterminalforexternallycontrollingtheprojectororforcontrollingexternaldevicesbytheprojector.

17. SLOT (→page159)

11

94

7

1

5621038

14 15 16

12

13

17

Page 24: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

9

1. Introduction

❹ Part Names of the Remote Control

1. Infrared Transmitter (→page11)

2. RemoteJack Connectacommerciallyavailableremotecablehereforwiredopera-tion.(→page11)

3. POWERONButton (→page16)

4. POWEROFFButton (→page26)

5. INFO/L-CALIB.Button Displaythe[SOURCE(1)]screenoftheon-screenmenu.

(→page125) [LENSCALIBRATION]ofthelensunitiscarriedoutwhenyoupresstheCTLbuttonatthesametime.

(→page16,106)

6. VOL./FOCUS+/−Buttons (→page24)

7. D-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−Buttons (→page24,30)

8. TESTButton (→page20,76)

9. ECO/L-SHIFTButton (→page23,31)

10.MENUButton (→page68)

11.EXITButton (→page68)

12.ENTERButton (→page68)

13. ▲▼◀▶Button (→page68)

14.ON-SCREENButton (→page29)

15.SHUTTERButton (→page28,105)

16.AV-MUTEButton (→page29)

17.PICTUREButton (→page80)

18.SOURCEButton (→page18)

1

3

4

6

14

10

12

16

20

7

2

5

8

9

11

15

1817

13

2119

252832

2322

35

24

30

26

29

34

27

3136

33

19.3DREFORMButton (→page34,94)

20.PIP/FREEZEButton (→page29,58)

21.AUTOADJ.Button (→page25)

22,23,24.COMPUTER1/2/3But-ton

(23&24arenotavailableonthisseriesoftheprojector)

(→page18)

25.VIDEOButton (→page18)

26.S-VIDEOButton (→page18)

27.HDMIButton (→page18)

28.DisplayPortButton (→page18)

29.VIEWERButton (TheVIEWERbuttonwillnotworkonthisseriesofprojectors.)

30.NETWORKButton (→page18)

31.SLOTButton (→page18,160)

32.IDSETButton (→page101,113)

33.Numeric(0to9/CLEAR)But-tons

(→page113) (TheAUXbuttonwillnotworkonthisseriesofprojectors.)

34.CTLButton Thisbuttonisusedinconjunctionwith other buttons, similar to aCTRLkeyonacomputer.

35.LIGHTButton Thisbuttonisusedtoturnonthebacklight for the remote controlbuttons.

The backlight will turn off if nobutton operation ismade for 10seconds.

36.HELPButton (→page125)

Page 25: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

10

1. Introduction

Battery Installation1. Press the catch and remove

the battery cover.2. Install new ones (AA). En-

sure that you have the bat-teries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly.

3. Slip the cover back over the batteries until it snaps into place.

NOTE:Donotmixdifferenttypesofbatteriesornewand old batteries.

1

2 1 2

Remote Control Precautions

• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.

• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.

• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.

• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.

• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.

• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.

• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.

• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.

• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Page 26: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

11

1. Introduction

Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control

15m/42.21ft

15m/42.21ft

Remotecontrol

Remotecontrol

Remotesensoronprojectorcabinet

15m/42.21ft

15m/42.21ft

30°30°

30°

30°30°

30° 30°

• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabovemetersandwithina60-degreeangleoftheremotesensorontheprojectorcabinet.

• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfallsonthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.

Using the Remote Control in Wired OperationConnectoneendoftheremotecabletotheREMOTEterminalandtheotherendtotheremotejackontheremotecontrol.

REMOTE

RemoteJack

NOTE: • WhenaremotecableisinsertedintotheREMOTEterminal,theremotecontroldoesnotworkforinfraredwirelesscommunication.• PowerwillnotbesuppliedtotheremotecontrolbytheprojectorviatheREMOTEjack.Batteryisneededwhentheremotecontrol

is used in wired operation.

Page 27: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

12

Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.

❶ Flow of Projecting an Image

Step 1• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→ page 13)

Step 2 • Turningontheprojector(→ page 15)

Step 3 • Selectingasource(→ page 18)

Step 4• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→ page 20)

• Correctingkeystonedistortion[CORNERSTONE](→ page 34)

Step 5• Adjustingapicture

- Optimizingacomputersignalautomatically(→page25)

Step 6• Makingapresentation

Step 7• Turningofftheprojector(→ page 26)

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Page 28: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

13

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❷ Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord

1. Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.

Thissectionwillshowyouabasicconnectiontoacomputer.Forinformationaboutotherconnections,see“1.Con-nectingacomputer”onpage129.

Connectthedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputertotheCOMPUTERINterminalontheprojectorwithacommercially-availablecomputercable(withferritecore)andthenturntheknobsoftheterminalstosecurethem.

2. Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.

Firstconnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplugtotheACINterminaloftheprojector,andthenconnecttheotherplugofthesuppliedpowercordinthewalloutlet.

WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.

ImportantInformation:

• Whenplugginginorunpluggingthesuppliedpowercord,makesurethatthemainpowerswitchispushedtotheoff[O]position.Failuretodosomaycausedamagetotheprojector.

• Donotuseathree-phasepowersupply.Doingsomaycausemalfunction.

COMPUTER IN

MakesurethattheprongsarefullyinsertedintoboththeACINterminalandthewalloutlet.

Towalloutlet

Computercable(withferritecore)(soldcommercially)

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

Page 29: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

14

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Using the Power Cord Fixing MetalTopreventthepowercordfromaccidentlyremovingfromtheACINoftheprojector,attachthepowercordfixingmetal.

CAUTION• Topreventthepowercordfromcomingloose,makesurethatalltheprongsofthepowercordarefullyinsertedintotheACINterminaloftheprojectorbeforeusingthepowercordfixingmetal.Aloosecontactofthepowercordmaycauseafireorelectricshock.

Attaching the power cord fixing metal1. PinchandpulloutthepowercordfixingmetalflapthatishousedovertheACINterminal.

PowerCordFixingMetal

2. Pull down the fixing metal flap over the power code until the fixing metal fits into the bottom stopper.

Upperstopper

Bottomstopper

Forreleasingthefixingmetalflap,pullitupuntilthefixingmetalfitsintotheupperstopper.

Page 30: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

15

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❸ Turning on the ProjectorNOTE:• Theprojectorhastwopowerswitches:AmainpowerswitchandaPOWERbutton(POWERONandOFFontheremotecontrol)•Turningontheprojector:1. Press the main power switch to the ON position (I).

Theprojectorwillgointostandbymode.

2. Press the POWER button .

Theprojectorwillbecomereadytouse.

•Turningofftheprojector:1. Press the POWER button.

Theconfirmationmessagewillbedisplayed.

2. Press the POWER button again.

Theprojectorwillgointostandbymode.

3. Press the main power switch to the OFF position (O).

Theprojectorwillbeturnedoff.

1. Press the main power switch to the ON position ( I ).

ThePOWERindicatorlightsupred.*

* ThisindicatesthattheSTANDBYmodeisin[NORMAL]setting.

(→page122,175)

• Thebuzzersound is releasedwhen [NOTIFICATIONSETTING]for[BUZZER]isON.

WARNING

Theprojector producesa strong light.When turningonthepower,makesurenoonewithinprojection range islookingatthelens.

NOTE: • The[STANDBYMODE]settingwillbedisabledandtheprojector

will go into the sleep mode when the network service is utilized ortheprojectorreceivesHDBaseTsignal.Inthesleepmode,thefans in the projector sometimes rotate for the purpose of interior partsprotection.Pleaserefertopage122 about the sleep mode.

Page 31: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

16

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

2. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control.

The POWER indicator goes from a steady red light toaflashingblue light,and thepicture isprojectedon thescreen.

• Ifusingtheremotecontrol,pressthePOWERONbutton.

• Whenthereisnosignaltheunitwillprojectabluescreen(factorydefaultmenusettings).

• Ifthepictureisblurry,adjustthescreenfocus.(→page24)

• Whenitisdarkpressthe (lights)button.TheindicatorpanelbacklightandtheLEDlampontherightsideoftheprojectorwillturnon.(→page7)

TIP:• TheunithasaPowerOnShutterfunctionthatallowsthelightsourcetoturnoffevenwhenconnectedtoapowersource.(→ page 105)

• PressingthebuttonwillnotactivatetheunitwhentheKEYLOCKindicatorisflashingorange.(→ page 28)

• Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOURPASSWORD.” is displayed, itmeans that the [SECURITY]featureisturnedon.(→ page 38)

Afteryouturnonyourprojector,ensurethatthecomputerorvideosourceisturnedon.

NOTE:Thebluescreen([BLUE]background)isdisplayedwhennosignalisbeinginput(byfactorydefaultmenusettings).

Standby Blinking Power On

Steady red light Blinking blue light

Steady blue light

(→page175)

Performing Lens Calibration • After installing or replacing the lens unit (below *) soldseparately,presstheLENSCALIBRATIONbuttonontheprojector,orholddowntheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrolthenpresstheINFO/L-CALIB.buttontocarryout [LENSCALIBRATION]. By carrying out [LENSCALIBRATION], the adjustmentrangeof thezoomandfocusof the[LENSMEMORY] iscalibrated. Ifyouneedtoinstallorreplacethelensunit,contactyourdealerandhavethemdoitforyou.

Page 32: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

17

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)Whenyoufirstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectoneofthe29menulanguages.

Toselectamenulanguage,followthesesteps:

1. Use the ▲, ▼, ◀ or ▶buttontoselectoneofthe29languagesfromthemenu.

2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.

After this has been done, you can proceed to themenuoperation.Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.(→[LANGUAGE]onpage72and101)

NOTE: • WhentheKEYLOCKindicatorisflashing,thatmeans[CONTROLPANELLOCK]hasbeensetandpressingthe button will not causetheunittopower-on.Release[CONTROLPANELLOCK].(→ page 28)

• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.(WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinlongcycles,theOFFTIMERisfunctionedandthepowercanbeturnedoff.)

Page 33: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

18

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❹ Selecting a SourceSelecting the computer or video sourceNOTE: Turn on the computer or video source equipment connected to the projector.

DetectingtheSignalAutomaticallyPress theSOURCEbutton for 1 secondor longer.Theprojectorwillsearchfortheavailableinputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeasfollows:

HDMI→DisplayPort→BNC→BNC(CV)→BNC(Y/C)→COMUPTER→HDBaseT→SLOT→ …

• Pressitbrieflytodisplaythe[INPUT]screen.

Pressthe▼/▲buttonstomatchthetargetinputterminalandthenpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtheinput.Todeletethemenudisplayinthe[INPUT]screen,presstheMENUorEXITbutton.

TIP:Ifnoinputsignalispresent,theinputwillbeskipped.

Using the Remote ControlPress any oneof theHDMI,DisplayPort,COMPUTER2,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,COMPUTER1,NETWORK,orSLOTbuttons.• COMPUTER2buttonselectstheBNCinputterminal.

• VIDEObuttonselectstheBNC(CV)inputterminal(CompositeVideo).

• S-VIDEObuttonselectstheBNC(Y/C)inputterminal(S-Video).

Page 34: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

19

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Selecting Default Source Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayedeachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BASIC].

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SOURCEOPTIONS].

4. Press the ▼buttonfourtimestoselect[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]screenwillbedisplayed.

(→page120)

5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbutton.

6. Press the EXIT button three times to close the menu.

7. Restart the projector.

Thesourceyouselectedinstep5willbeprojected.

NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[HDBaseT]willnotbeautomaticallyselected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[HDBaseT].

TIP:• WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINinputwill

power on the projector and simultaneously project the computer’s image. ([AUTOPOWERONSELECT]→ page 123)• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallowsyoutosetupexternaldisplayeasilyandquickly.

Page 35: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

20

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❺ Adjusting the Picture Size and PositionUsethelensshiftdial,theleveladjusterlever,thezoomlever/zoomringandthefocusringtoadjustthepicturesizeandposition.Inthischapterdrawingsandcablesareomittedforclarity.

Adjustingtheprojector’ssettings[Leveladjuster](→page21)

Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontalposition[Lensshift](→page22)

Adjustingthefocus[Focus](→page24)

Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage[Zoom](→page24)

TIP:• Built-intestpatternscanbeconvenientlyusedforadjustingthepicturesizeandposition.(→ page 76) ApressoftheTESTbuttonwilldisplaythetestpattern.The◀ or ▶ button can select one test pattern. To close the test pattern,

change the source to another.

Page 36: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

21

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

CAUTION

• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Adjustingfromthefrontcouldexposeyoureyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.

• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhilethelensshiftisinoperation.Failuretodosocouldresultinhandsbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.

Adjustment of the projector’s settings (Level adjusters)Theprojectormustbeplacedsquaretothescreenotherwisekeystonedistortionmayappearonthescreen.Forset-tingtheprojectorperpendiculartothescreenwhenviewedfromtheside,utilizingtheleveladjustersequippedateachcorneroftheprojectorbottom.MaximumAdjustablelengthoftheleveladjusteris10mm/0.39".

Example for adjustment

NOTE:• Donotlengtheneachoftheleveladjustersanymorethan10mm/0.39".Theforceofdoingsomaycausetheleveladjusterto

come off, resulting in damage to the projector.• Payattentiontolengthenorshortentwoleveladjustersatfrontatthesametime.Samefortherearadjusters,otherwise,the

weight of the projector is loaded on one level adjuster and it may cause of damage to it.

Raise Raise

Lower Lower

Leveladjuster

Page 37: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

22

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)

NOTE:• Shiftingthelenstothemaximumintwodirectionscombinedwillcausetheedgesoftheimagetobecomedarkorwillcause

some shadows.

Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet1. Press the LENS SHIFT/HOME POSITION button.

The[LENSSHIFT]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀ or ▶ button.

Usethe▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

• Returningthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition

PressandholdtheLENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONbuttonfor2secondstoreturnthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition(nearlycenterposition)

Page 38: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

23

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting with the remote control1. HoldtheCTLbuttonandpresstheECO/L-SHIFTbutton.

The[LENSSHIFT]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀ or ▶ button.

Usethe▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

TIP:• Thefigurebelowshowsthelensshiftranges(projectionmode:desktop/front)oflensunitsNP-9LS08ZM1,NP-9LS12ZM1,NP-9LS13ZM1,andNP-9LS16ZM1.

100%V

50%V20%V 20%V

20%V20%V50%V

100%H

11%H 11%H

11%H11%H

Heightofprojectedimage

Widthofprojectedimage

Descriptionofsymbols:Vindicatesvertical(heightoftheprojectedimage),Hindicateshorizontal(widthoftheprojectedimage).

Page 39: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

24

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Focus

NOTE:• ForlensunitNP-9LS08ZM1,bothcentralandperipheralfocusmustbeadjusted.UsetheFOCUS+/−buttonstoadjustthecentral

focus. If the peripheral focus is off, contact your dealer to have them adjust it.1. PresstheFOCUS+/−button.

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,pressonVOL/FOCUS(+)or(−)button.

Thefocusisadjusted.

TIP:Toobtainthebestfocus,performthefollowing(forfixedinstallation)Preparation:Warmuptheprojectorforonehour.1.UsetheFOCUS+/−buttonstomakesureyouobtainthebestfocus.Ifyoudonot,movetheprojectorbackandforth.2.Selectthe[TESTPATTERN]fromthemenuanddisplaythetestpattern.(→ page 76)• YoucanalsousetheTESTbuttonontheremotecontroltodisplaythetestpattern.

3.KeeppressingtheFOCUS−buttonuntilthegridofthetextpatternismadeinvisible.4.KeeppressingtheFOCUS+buttonuntilyouobtainthebestfocus. If you adjust beyond the best focal point, go back to step 3 and repeat the procedures.

Zoom1. Press the ZOOM +/− button.

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,presstheD-ZOOM/ZOOM(+)or(−)button.

Thezoomisadjusted.

Page 40: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

25

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❻ Optimizing Computer Signal AutomaticallyAdjusting the Image Using Auto AdjustWhenanimagefromHDMIIN,DisplayPortIN,BNCinputterminal(analogRGB),COMPUTERIN,orHDBaseTisbeingprojected,andtheedgeiscutoffortheimagequalityispoor,thisbuttoncanbeusedtoautomaticallyoptimizetheprojectionimageonthescreen.

PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.Thisadjustmentmaybenecessarywhenyouconnectyourcomputerforthefirsttime.

[Poorpicture] [Normalpicture]

NOTE:Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]manually.(→ page 84, 85)

Page 41: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

26

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❼ Turning off the ProjectorTo turn off the projector:

1. First, press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote con-trol.

The[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?/CARBONSAV-INGS-SESSION0.000[g-CO2]]messagewillappear.

2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the (POWER) or the POWER OFF button again.

When theprojector is inSTANDBYMODE, thePOWERindicator lights up red. (When [STANDBY MODE] is in[NORMAL]setting)

• BeforethePOWERindicatorlightsupred,thebuzzersoundisreleasedwhen[NOTIFICATIONSETTING]for[BUZZER]isON.

3. Make sure the projector is in STANDBY MODE, then turnoffthemainpowerswitch(○ OFF)

ThePOWERindicatorwillgooffandthemainpowerwillturnoff.

• While the POWER indicator is blinking blue in shortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.

Power On

Steady blue light

Standby

Steady red lightPress twice

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaytemporarilyoverheatiftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththemainpowerswitchortheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedwhiletheprojectorisinoperationorthecoolingfanisrunning.Handlewithcare.

Page 42: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

27

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

NOTE:• Donotunplugthepowercordfromtheprojectororfromthepoweroutletwhileanimageisbeingprojected.Doingsocoulddeterioratetheprojector’sACINterminalorthepowerplug’scontact.ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispowered on, use the projector’s main power switch, a power strip equipped with a switch, or a breaker.

• DonotturnoffthemainpowerswitchordisconnecttheACpowersupplywithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentsorsettingchangesandclosingthemenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.

Page 43: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

28

3. Convenient Features❶ Stopping projection1. Press the SHUTTER button on the projector or on the remote

control.

Thelightsourcewillturnoffandthelightoftheprojectorwilltemporarilygodark.TheSHUTTERindicatorwillturnoningreen.

Press the button again and projection will resume.The SHUTTERindicatorwillturnoff.

Youcansettheprojectionlighttograduallyfadeinorfadeout.

Ontheprojector Ontheremote

SHUTTER indicator

❷ Turning off the light source1 Press the (light source) button on the projector.

Holdthebuttonforthreesecondswhenthepowerisontoturnoffthelightsourcedirectly(thecoolingfanwillalsostop).TheLIGHTindicatorwillturnoff.

• Ifthe (lightsource)buttonwillbehelddownforthreesecondsagain,theLIGHTindicatorwillflashingreen.

LIGHT indicator

❸ Locking the projector so it cannot be operated1 PresstheKEYLOCKbuttonforover1secondontheprojector.

TheKEYLOCKindicatorwillturnoninorangeandalltheprojector’soperatingbuttonswillbelocked.

• PresstheKEYLOCKbuttonforover1secondagaintoturnofftheKEYLOCKindicatorandunlockthebuttons.

TIP:• When[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isengageda“ ”iconappearsinthelowerright-handcornerofthemenuscreen.• Theprojectorcanstillbeoperatedusingtheremotecontrolevenwhenthebuttonsontheunitarelocked.

Page 44: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

29

3. Convenient Features

❹ Muting the Image (AV Mute)PresstheAV-MUTEbuttontoturnofftheimageforashortperiodoftime.Pressagaintorestoretheimage.

TIP:• Theimagewilldisappearbutnotthemenudisplay.

❺ Turning Off the On-Screen Menu (On-Screen Mute)ApressoftheON-SCREENbuttonontheremotecontrolwillhidetheon-screenmenu,thesourcedisplayandothermessages.Pressagaintorestorethem.

TIP:• Toconfirmthattheon-screenmuteisturnedon,presstheMENUbutton.Iftheon-screenmenuisnotdisplayedeventhoughyoupresstheMENUbutton,itmeanstheon-screenmuteisturnedon.

• Theon-screenmuteismaintainedevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff,• HoldingdowntheMENUbuttonforatleast10secondswillturnofftheon-screenmute.

❻ Freezing a PictureHoldtheCTLbuttonandpressthePIP/FREEZEbuttontofreezeapicture.Pressagaintoresumemotion.

NOTE: The image is frozen but the original video is still playing ahead.

Page 45: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

30

3. Convenient Features

❼ Magnifying a PictureYoucanmagnifythepictureuptofourtimes.

NOTE: • Dependingonaninputsignal,themaximummagnificationmaybelessthanfourtimes,orthefunctionmayberestricted.

Todoso:

1. PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.

2. Press the ▲▼◀▶ button. Theareaofthemagnifiedimagewillbemoved

3. Press the D-ZOOM (−) button.

EachtimetheD-ZOOM(−)buttonispressed,theimageisdemagni-fied.

NOTE: • Theimagewillbemagnifiedordemagnifiedatthecenterofthescreen.• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnification.

Page 46: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

31

3. Convenient Features

❽ Changing LIGHT MODE/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using LIGHT MODE [LIGHT MODE]Wheneither[ECO1]or[ECO2]in[LIGHTMODE]isselected,motionnoiseoftheprojectoriscutdownbyloweringbrightnessofitslightsource.Bysavingenergyconsumption,theCO2emissionfromthisprojectorcanbereduced.

LIGHTMODEIconatthebottomofthemenu

Description

NORMAL 100%brightnessThescreenwillbebrightlylit.

ECO1 Brightnesswillbeatabout80%.Thecoolingfanwillalsoslowdownaccordingly.Lowerpowerconsumption

ECO2 Brightnesswillbeatabout50%.Thecoolingfanwillalsoslowdownaccordingly.Lowerpowerconsumptionconsiderably

LONGLIFE Brightnessisabout90%.Thissettingspeedsupthecoolingfanandoptimizestheservicelifeofthelightsource.

* Whenthebrightnessislowered,thecoolingfanspeedwillbereducedaccordingly.

Toturnonthe[LIGHTMODE],dothefollowing:1. Press LIGHT button on the cabinet.

• Inanotherway,pressECO/L-SHIFTbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The[LIGHTMODE]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ENTER button.

The[LIGHTMODE]selectionscreenwillbedisplayed.

3. Use the ▼▲ buttons to make a selection, and press the ENTER button.

Thedisplaywillreturntothe[LIGHTMODE]screenandtheselectedoptionwillbeapplied.

PresstheMENUbuttontoreturntotheoriginalscreen.

Page 47: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

32

3. Convenient Features

NOTE: • The[LIGHTMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu. Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[LIGHTMODE]→[LIGHTMODE].• Thelightmoduleusedhourscanbecheckedin[USAGETIME].Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysablue,blackorlogoscreen,[LIGHTMODE]willautomaticallyswitchto[ECO].Bytheautomaticsettingto[ECO],theprojectorwillbeautomaticallyresettotheprevioussettingwhenitdetectsinputsignal.

• Iftheprojectorisoverheatedin[NORMAL]mode,theremaybeacasetheprojectorautomaticallylowersthebrightnessasaprotectivefunction.Thisiscalled“ForcedECOMODE”.WhentheprojectorisintheForcedECOMODE,thepicturebrightnessdecreasesslightlyandtheTEMP.indicatorlightsorange.AtthesametimetheThermometersymbol[ ]isdisplayedatthebot-tom right of the screen.

Whentheprojectorcomesbacktonormaltemperature,theForcedECOMODEiscancelledandthe[LIGHTMODE]returnsto[NORMAL]mode.

Page 48: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

33

3. Convenient Features

Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO2emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[LIGHTMODE]issettoeither[ECO1],[ECO2],or[LONGLIFE].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].

Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO2emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcanchecktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page125)

The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO2emissionreductionbetweenthetimeofchangingtoLIGHTMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.

TIP:• TheformulashownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO2emissionreduction.AmountofCO2emissionreduction=(Powerconsumptionin[NORMAL]LIGHTMODE–Powerconsumptionincurrentsetting)×CO2conversionfactor.*Settingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[ECO1],[ECO2],or[LONGLIFE]increasesCO2 emissions savings.* CalculationforamountofCO2emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO2EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,2008Edition”.

• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[LIGHTMODE]isturnedonoroff.

Page 49: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

34

3. Convenient Features

❾ Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion [CORNERSTONE]

Usethe[CORNERSTONE]featuretocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleftorrightsideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.

1. Pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2secondsatleasttoresetcurrentadjustments.

Currentadjustmentsfor[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]willbecleared.

2. Projectanimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheraster.

Projectedimage

Thedrawingshowstheupperrightcorner.

3. Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.

4. Press the 3D REFORM button.

Displaythe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]screenoftheon-screenmenu.

Page 50: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

35

3. Convenient Features

5. Press the ▼buttontoalignwiththe[CORNERSTONE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

Thedrawingshowstheupperlefticon( )isselected.

Thescreenwillswitchtothe[CORNERSTONE]screen.

NOTE:• Whena[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]functionotherthan[CORNERSTONE]hasbeensetup,the[CORNERSTONE]screenwillnotbedisplayed.Whenthescreenisnotdisplayed,eitherpressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds,orrun[RESET]in[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]tocleartheadjustmentvalueof[GEOMETRICCORRECTION].

6. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select one icon (▲) which points in the direction you wish to move the projected imageframe.

7. Press the ENTER button.

8. Use the ▲▼◀▶buttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.

9. PresstheENTERbutton.

10. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select another icon which points in the direction.

11.Repeatstepsfrom7to10tocompletethecornerstoneadjustment.

12.Onthe[CORNERSTONE]screen,select[EXIT]orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrol.

Theconfirmationscreenisdisplayed.

Page 51: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

36

3. Convenient Features

13. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiscompletesthe[CORNERSTONE]correction.

• Returningtothe[CORNERSTONE]screen,select[CANCEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: • Evenwhentheprojectoristurnedon,thelastusedcorrectionvaluesareapplied.• Carryouteitheroneofthefollowingactionstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[CORNERSTONE].• InStep12,select[RESET]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.• Pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Run[DISPLAY]→[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[RESET]intheon-screenmenu.

• UsingCORNERSTONEcorrectioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.

Page 52: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

37

3. Convenient Features

❿ Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeywordisset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-jectorcannotprojectanimage.•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.

ToenabletheSecurityfunction:

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[MENU].

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[CONTROL].

4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.

5. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[SECURITYKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.

6. Typeinacombinationofthefour▲▼◀▶ buttons and press the ENTER button.

NOTE:Akeywordmustbe4to10digitsinlength.

The[CONFIRMKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.

NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.

Page 53: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

38

3. Convenient Features

7. Typeinthesamecombinationof▲▼◀▶ buttons and press the ENTER button.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheSECURITYfunctionhasbeenenabled.

Toturnontheprojectorwhen[SECURITY]isenabled:

1. Press the button.

• Ifusingtheremotecontrol,pressthePOWERONbutton.

Theprojectorwillbeturnedonanddisplayamessagetotheeffectthattheprojectorislocked.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.

NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off or unplugging the power cord.

Page 54: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

39

3. Convenient Features

TodisabletheSECURITYfunction:

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.

3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheSECURITYKEYWORDscreenwillbedisplayed.

4. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button.

Whenthecorrectkeywordisentered,theSECURITYfunctionwillbedisabled.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequestcode.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConfirmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]is a request code.

Page 55: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

40

3. Convenient Features

⓫ Projecting 3D videosThisprojectorsupportsDLP-Linkglassesand3Demitter.

CAUTION

Health precautionsBeforeuse,pleasemakesuretoreadanyhealthprecautionsthatmaybestatedintheoperatingmanualsenclosedwiththe3Deyewearand3Dvideosoftware(Blu-rayplayer,games,computeranimationfiles,etc.).Pleasetakenoteofthefollowinginordertoavoidadversehealtheffects.• Pleasedonotusethe3Deyewearforpurposesotherthantowatch3Dvideos.• Pleasekeepadistanceofatleast2mawayfromthescreenwhenwatchingvideos.Watchingavideotooclosetothescreenwillincreaseeyefatigue.• Pleasedonotwatchvideoscontinuouslyforalongperiodoftime.Pleasetakea15minutes’breakaftereveryhourofwatching.• Pleaseconsultadoctorbeforewatchingifyouoranyofyourfamilymembershaveahistoryofsufferingfromseizurescausedbylightsensitivity.• Pleasestopwatchingimmediatelyandtakearestwhenyoufeelphysicallyunwellwhilewatching(vomiting,gid-diness,nausea,headaches,soreeyes,blurredvision,crampsanddumbnessinthelimbs,etc.).Pleaseconsultadoctorifthesymptomspersist.• Pleasewatcha3Dvideodirectlyinfrontofthescreen.Ifyouwatcha3Dvideoobliquelyfromthesides,thismayresultinphysicalandeyefatigue.

Procedure to watch 3D videos using this projector

3Deyewearand3DemitterpreparationsUseanactiveshuttersystem3DglassesconformedwithVESA.RecommendtouseRFtypeglassesproducedbyXpand• 3DGlasses:XpandX105-RF• 3DEmitter:XpandAD025-RF-X1

1. Connectthevideodevicetotheprojector.

2. Switch on the projector.

3. Runthe3Dvideosoftwareandprojectthevideousingtheprojector.

[AUTOMATIC]issetasthefactorydefaultsetting.Whena3Dvideocannotbeprojected,itmaycauseonno3Dsignalortheprojectorcannotdetectthe3Dsignal.Inthiscase,selecttheformatmanually.

4. Selectthe3Dvideoformat.

(1)PresstheMENUbutton.

TheMENUwillbedisplayed.

(2)Pressthe▶button,select[ADJUST],thenpressENTER.

[PICTURE]willbehighlighted.

Page 56: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

41

3. Convenient Features

(3)Usethe▶buttontoselect[3DSETTINGS].

The[3DSETTINGS]screenwillbedisplayed.

(4)Usethe▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[FORMAT],thenpressENTER.

The[FORMAT]screenwillbedisplayed.

(5)Usethe▼/▲buttonstoalignthecursoratoneamongformatoptions,thenpressENTERforsettingitup.

Thedisplaywillreturntothe[3DSETTINGS]screen.

PresstheMENUbuttontoreturntotheoriginalscreen.

• The3Dcautionmessagescreenwillbedisplayedwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo(defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped).Pleasereadthe“HealthPrecautions”onthepreviouspagetowatchvideosinthecorrectmanner.Thescreenwilldisappearafter60secondsorwhentheENTERbuttonispressed.(→page102)

5. Turnonthepowersupplyofthe3Deyewearandweartheeyeweartowatchthevideo.

Anormalvideowillbeshownwhena2Dvideoisinput.

Towatcha3Dvideoin2D,select[OFF(2D)]inthe[FORMAT]screenmentionedabovein(5).

NOTE:• Uponswitchingto3Dimage,thefollowingfunctionswillbecancelledanddisabled.[BLANKING],[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[EDGEBLENDING]([GEOMETRICCORRECTION]and[EDGEBLENDING]adjustmentvalueswillbemaintained.)

• Theoutputmaynotautomaticallyswitchtoa3Dvideodependingonthe3Dinputsignal.• ChecktheoperatingconditionsdescribedintheusermanualoftheBlu-rayplayer.• PleaseconnecttheDINterminalofthe3Demittertothe3DSYNCofthemainprojector.• The3Deyewearallowsvideostobeviewedin3Dbyreceivingsynchronizedopticalsignalsoutputfromthe3Demitter. Asaresult,the3Dimagequalitymaybeaffectedbyconditionssuchasthebrightnessofthesurroundings,screensize,viewing

distance, etc.• Whenplayinga3Dvideosoftwareonacomputer,the3DimagequalitymaybeaffectedifthecomputerCPUandgraphicschipperformancearelow.Pleasechecktherequiredoperatingenvironmentofthecomputerthatisstatedintheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Dvideosoftware.

• Dependingonthesignal,[FORMAT]and[L/RINVERT]maynotbeabletobeselected.Pleasechangethesignalinthatcase.

Page 57: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

42

3. Convenient Features

When videos cannot be viewed in 3DPleasecheckthefollowingpointswhenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D.Pleasealsoreadtheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Deyewear.

Possible reasons Solutions

The selected signal does not support 3D output. Please change the video signal input to one that supports 3D.

The format for the selected signal is turned to [OFF(2D)]. Please change the format in the on-screen menu to [AUTO] or a format that supports 3D.

A eyewear that is not supported by the projector is being used. Please purchase a commercially-available 3D eyewear or 3D emit-ter (recommended). (→ page 40)

Please check the following points when a video cannot be viewed in 3D using a 3D eyewear that is supported by the projector.

The power supply of the 3D eyewear is turned off. Please turn on the power supply of the 3D eyewear.

The internal battery of the 3D eyewear is flat. Please charge or replace the battery.

The viewer is located too far away from the screen. Please get closer to the screen until the video can be seen in 3D.

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF].

Due to multiple 3D projectors working at the same time in the vicinity, the projectors may interfere with one another. Alter-natively, there may be a bright light source near the screen.

Please maintain sufficient distance between the projectors.

Please keep the light source away from the screen.

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF].

There is an obstacle between the optical receiver of the 3D eye-wear and the 3D emitter.

Please remove the obstacle.

The 3D format of the 3D video contents is not supported. Please check with the company selling the 3D video contents.

Page 58: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

43

3. Convenient Features

⓬ Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP BrowserOverviewTheHTTPServerfunctionprovidessettingsandoperationsfor:1. Settingforwirednetwork(NETWORKSETTINGS)

TousewiredLANconnection,connecttheprojectortothecomputerwithacommerciallyavailableLANcable.(→ page138)

2. Setting Alert Mail (ALERT MAIL)

Whentheprojectorisconnectedtoawirednetwork,errormessageswillbesentviae-mail.

3. Operating the projector

Poweron/off,selectinginput,andpictureadjustmentsarepossible.

4. SettingPJLinkPASSWORDandAMXBEACON

AccesstotheHTTPserverfunctionisavailable:• StarttheWebbrowseronthecomputerviathenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorandenterthefollowing

URL :

http://<the projector’s IP address> /index.html

TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].

NOTE: • Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournetwork. Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedinrapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-tor.

• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourwebbrowser(orclearthecache).

• Thisprojectoruses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwillvarydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelpfilesandtheotherinformationprovidedinyoursoftware.

Preparation before UseConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page138)Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthesettingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeensetwillnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbereflectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.

Page 59: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

44

3. Convenient Features

Handling of the Address for Operation via a BrowserRegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationofthepro-jectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”fileofthecomputerbeingused.

Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://192.168.73.1/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT

POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.ON ......................... Power is switched on.OFF ........................ Power is switched off.

VOLUME:Cannotbeusedforthisdevice.

AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.PICTURE ON .......... Mutes the video.PICTURE OFF ......... Cancels the video muting.SOUND ON ............ Cannot be used for this device.SOUND OFF ........... Cannot be used for this device.ALL ON .................. Mutes the video functions.ALL OFF ................. Cancels the muting of the video functions.

Page 60: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

45

3. Convenient Features

PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.BRIGHTNESS ▲ .... Increases the brightness adjustment value.BRIGHTNESS ▼ .... Decreases the brightness adjustment value.CONTRAST ▲ ........ Increases the contrast adjustment value.CONTRAST ▼ ........ Decreases the contrast adjustment value.COLOR ▲ .............. Increases the color adjustment value.COLOR ▼ .............. Decreases the color adjustment value.HUE ▲ ................... Increases the hue adjustment value.HUE ▼ ................... Decreases the hue adjustment value.SHARPNESS ▲ ..... Increases the sharpness adjustment value.SHARPNESS ▼ ..... Decreases the sharpness adjustment value.

• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page82,83)

SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputterminaloftheprojector.HDMI ..................... Switches to the HDMI IN terminal.DisplayPort ............ Switches to the DisplayPort IN.BNC ....................... Switch to BNC video input.BNC(CV) ................ Switch to BNC (CV) video input.BNC(Y/C) ............... Switch to BNC (Y/C) video input.COMPUTER ........... Switches to the COMPUTER IN terminal.HDBaseT ................ Switch to image input sent from a transmission device that supports HDBaseT.SLOT ...................... The projector switches to video input from the optional board when an optional board (sold separately) is

equipped on.

PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.LIGHT HOURS USED ..........Displays how many hours the light module has been used.FILTER HOURS USED .........The number of filter hours used is displayed.ERROR STATUS ..................Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector.

LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).

Page 61: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

46

3. Convenient Features

NETWORK SETTINGS

•SETTINGS

WIRED

SETTING SetforwiredLAN.

APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLAN.

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.

DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection

DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.

DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassign IPaddressofDNSserverconnected to theprojector.

AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

Page 62: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

47

3. Convenient Features

•NAME

PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorso thatyourcomputercan identify theprojector.Aprojectornamemustbe16charactersorless.TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe15orless.

DOMAINNAME Enter thedomainnameof thenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainnamemustbe60charactersorless.

•ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroferrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwiredLAN.PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:Subject:[Projector]ProjectorInformationTHECOOLINGFANHASSTOPPED.[INFORMATION]PROJECTORNAME:PH1202HLSeriesLIGHTHOURSUSED:0000[H]FILTERHOURSUSED:0000[H]

SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.

SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.

RECIPIENT’SADDRESS1,2,3

Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.

TESTMAIL SendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornotNOTE:• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork

settings are correct.• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.

Page 63: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

48

3. Convenient Features

•NETWORKSERVICE

PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.

HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.Whenapasswordissetup,youwillbepromptedforyourusername(arbitrary)andpasswordduringLOGON.

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.

NOTE: If you forget your password, contact your dealer.

*WhatisPJLink?PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.ThisstandardprotocolisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

CRESTRON

•ROOMVIEWformanagingfromthecomputer.

DISABLE DisablesROOMVIEW.

ENABLE EnablesROOMVIEW.

•CRESTRONCONTROLformanagingfromthecontroller.

DISABLE DisablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

ENABLE EnablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCRESTRONSERVER.

IPID SetyourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

•INFORMATION

WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.

UPDATE Reflectsettingswhentheyarechanged.

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

Page 64: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

49

3. Convenient Features

⓭ Storing Changes for Lens Shift, Zoom, and Focus [LENS MEMORY]TheadjustedvaluescanbestoredinprojectormemorywhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.Therearetwowaystosaveadjustedvaluesforlensshift,zoom,andfocus.

Functionname Description page

REF.LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluescommontoallinputsignals.Atthetimeofinstallation,twokindsofadjustedvaluescanberecorded.Ifnoadjustedvaluesarestoredin[LENSMEMORY],adjustedvaluesfromtheselectedprofile([REF.LENSMEMORY])willbeappliedforlensadjustment.

→page106

LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluesforeachinputsignal.Usetheadjustedvaluesforthesignalwithadifferentaspectratioorresolution.Theadjustedvaluescanbeappliedatthetimeofsourceselection.

→page91

NOTE:• Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelensunit.(→ page 16, 106) If you need to replace the lens unit, contact your dealer and have them do it for you.

Usage ExampleWhenyouwishtodisplayonascreenhavinga4:3aspectratioanNTSCorother4:3aspectratiosignalandanSXGAorother5:4aspectratiosignal:

Performshift,focus,andzoomadjustmentstosettheverticalscreensizeoftheverticallytall5:4aspectratiosignaltostandard.Both4:3aspectratiosignalsand5:4aspectratiosignalscannowbedisplayed.Notethatwiththeseshift,focus,andzoomadjustments,the4:3aspectratiosignalwillbecomesmalleronthescreen.Toeliminatethissizereduction,adjusttheshift,focusandzoomtotheoptimumconditionforeachofthe4:3aspectratiosignalandthe5:4aspectratiosignal.Memory(storage)ofeachofthesevalueswillpermitprojectionatanoptimumconditionuponsignalswitching.

To store your adjusted values in [REF. LENS MEMORY]:1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION].

4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Page 65: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

50

3. Convenient Features

The[REF.LENSMEMORY]screenwillbedisplayed.

5. Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROFILE]selectionscreenappears.

6. Press the ▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Returntothe[REF.LENSMEMORY]settingsscreen.

7. Select[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Selecta[PROFILE]numberandsavetheadjusted[LENSSHIFT],[ZOOM],and[FOCUS]valuestoit.

• The[FORCEDMUTE]settingstopsprojectionduringlensshift.(→page105)

Page 66: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

51

3. Convenient Features

9. PresstheMENUbutton.

Themenuwillbeclosed.

TIP:• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 91)

To call up your adjusted values from [REF. LENS MEMORY]:1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION].

4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[REF.LENSMEMORY]screenwillbedisplayed.

5. Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROFILE]selectionscreenappears.

6. Press the ▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Page 67: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

52

3. Convenient Features

Returntothe[REF.LENSMEMORY]settingsscreen.

7. Select[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thelenswillshiftbasedontheadjustedvaluesstoredintheselected[PROFILE].

8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theadjustedvalueswillbeappliedtothecurrentsignal..

9. PresstheMENUbutton.

Themenuwillbeclosed.

Page 68: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

53

3. Convenient Features

TIP:Tocalluptheadjustedvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Duringprojection,iftheadjustedvaluesforaninputsignalhavebeensaved,thelenswillshift.Ifnot,thelenswillshiftaccordingtotheadjustedvaluesstoredintheselected[REF.LENSMEMORY][PROFILE]number.

Toautomaticallyapplytheadjustedvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]andpresstheENTERbut-

ton.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillmovethelensautomaticallytothepositionatthetimeofsourceselectionaccordingtotheadjustedvalues.

NOTE:TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjustedvaluesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingtheadjustedvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,finelyadjustthelens shift, zoom and focus to produce the best possible image.

Page 69: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

54

4. Multi-Screen Projection❶ Things that can be done using multi-screen projectionThisprojectorcanbeusedsinglyorarrangedinmultipleunitsformulti-screenprojection.Wewillintroduceanexampleusingtwoprojectionscreenshere.

Case 1Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideosatthesametime[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]

Case 2Usingfourprojectors(resolution:FULLHD)toprojectvideowitharesolutionof3840×2160pixels[TILING]

Case 1. Using a single projector to project two types of videos [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

Connection example and projection image

Inthecaseof[PICTUREBYPICTURE] Inthecaseof[PIP]

On-screenmenuoperationsDisplay[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE].Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”.(→page58)

Page 70: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

55

Case 2. Using four projectors (resolution: FULL HD) to project videos with a resolution of 3840 × 2160 pixels [TILING]

Connection example and projection image

On-screenmenuoperations1 Foursimilarvideosaredisplayedwhenfourprojectorsareprojected.

Pleaserequestthedealertoadjusttheprojectionpositionofeachprojector.

Page 71: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

56

2 Operatetheon-screenmenuusingthefourrespectiveprojectorstodividetheimageintofourportions.

Display[DISPLAY]→[MULTISCREEN]→[PICTURESETTING]Screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[TIL-ING].

(1)Inthescreenforsettingthenumberofhorizontalunits,select[2UNITS].(numberofunitsinthehorizontaldirec-tion)

(2)Inthescreenforsettingthenumberofverticalunits,select[2UNITS].(numberofunitsintheverticaldirection)

(3)Inthescreenforsettingthehorizontalorder,select[1stUNIT]or[2ndUNIT].

(lookatthescreens,theoneontheleftisthe[1stUNIT]whiletheoneontherightisthe[2ndUNIT])

(4)Inthescreenforsettingtheverticalorder,selectthe[1stUNIT]orthe[2ndUNIT].

(lookatthescreens,theoneatthetopisthe[1stUNIT]whiletheoneatthebottomisthe[2ndUNIT])

3 Adjustthelensshiftofeachprojectortofine-tunetheboundariesofthescreen.

Forfurtherfine-tuning,adjustusing[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]intheon-screenmenuforeachprojector.

Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-3DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING]”.

(→page62)

Page 72: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

57

Things to note when installing projectors• Leave60cm/23.6"oroverspacebetweentheprojectorswhenprojectorsareinstalledsidebyside,sothattheintakeventsoftheprojectorsarenotobstructed.Inaddition,leaveaspaceofatleast30cm/11.8"betweentheintakeventandthewallandatleast70cm/27.6"betweentheexhaustventandthewall.Whentheairintakeanddischargeoutletareobstructed,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillriseandthismayresultinamalfunction.

60cm/23.6"orgreater

• Donotdirectlystackprojectorunits.

WARNINGProjectorsstackeddirectlycouldfallandcauseinjury.Theprojector(s)couldalsobecomedamagedorbroken.

• Exampleofmultipleprojectorsinstalledtogether Whenusingmultipleprojectorstogetherformultiscreenprojection,besuretosetthemupinaspecializedprojectorcabinetliketheonethatfollows.[Installationexample]

IntakeventIntakevent Cabinet

Airdischarge

Airintake

Rear Rear

WARNING

Pleaserequestthedealerforspecialinstallationservicessuchaswhenmountingtheprojectortotheceiling.Nevercarryouttheinstallationbyyourself.Theprojectormayfalldownandresultininjury.Pleaseuseasturdycabinetthatcanwithstandtheweightoftheprojectorfortheinstallation.Pleasedonotpileuptheprojectorsdirectlyontopofoneanother.

NOTE:• Fortherangeoftheprojectiondistance,pleaserefertotheAppendix“Throwdistanceandscreensize”.(→ page 156)

Page 73: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

58

❷ Displaying Two Pictures at the Same TimeTheprojectorhasafeaturethatallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.Youhavetwomodes:pictureinpicture(PIP)modeandpicturebypicture(PICTUREBYPICTURE)mode.Theprojectionvideointhefirstscreendisplayisknownasthemaindisplaywhiletheprojectionvideothatiscalledoutsubsequentlyisknownasthesub-display.Selecttheprojectionfunctionunder[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]intheon-screenmenu(thedefaultfactorysettingwhenshippedisPIP).(→page92)• Asinglescreenisprojectedwhenpoweristurnedon.

Picture in Picture function (PIP)Asmallsub-displayisdisplayedinsidethemaindisplay.

Thesub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→page93)• Selectwhethertodisplaythesub-displayatthetopright,topleft,bottomrightorbottomleftofthescreen(thesizeofthesub-displaycanbeselectedandthepositioncanbefine-tuned)• Switchthemaindisplaywiththesub-display

Main Display

Sub-Display

Picturebypicturefunction(PICTUREBYPICTURE)Displaythemaindisplayandsub-displaysidebyside.

Themaindisplayandsub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→ page93)• Selectingthedisplayboundary(ratio)ofthemaindisplayandsub-display• Switchthemaindisplayandsub-display

Main Display Sub-Display

Inputterminalsthatcanbeusedforthemainscreenandsub-screen.Themainscreenandsub-screencanprovidethefollowinginputterminals.• Themaindisplayandsub-displaysupportcomputersignalsuptoWUXGA@60HzRB.

Sub-Display or additional displayHDMI DisplayPort BNC BNC(CV) BNC(Y/C) COMPUTER HDBaseT SLOT

Main Display

HDMI No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NoDisplayPort Yes Yes Yes YesBNC Yes Yes

NoNo Yes Yes

BNC(CV) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesBNC(Y/C) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesCOMPUTER Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes YesHDBaseT No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NoSLOT No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

NOTE:• Somesignalsmaynotappeardependingontheresolution.

Page 74: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

59

Projecting two screens1. PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Thisdisplaysthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]screenintheon-screenmenu.

2. Select[SUBINPUT]usingthe▼/▲ buttons, and press the ENTER button.

Thisdisplaysthe[SUBINPUT]screen.

3. Select the input signal using the ▼/▲ buttons, and press the ENTER button.

The[PIP](PICTUREINPICTURE)or[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screensetupunder[MODE]isprojected.(→page92)

• Whenthesignalnameisdisplayedingrey,thismeansthatitcannotbeselected.

• ThesignalcanalsobeselectedbypressingthePIP/FREEZEbuttonontheremotecontrol.

4. Press the MENU button.

Theon-screenmenuwilldisappear.

5. Whenreturningtosinglescreen,displaythe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTUE]screenonemoretimeandselect[OFF]inthe[SUBINPUT]screenoftheStep3.

TIP:• Duringdual-screenprojection,iftheselectedinputisnotsupportedbythesub-screen,thesub-screenwillappearasablack

screen.

Page 75: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

60

Switching the main display with the sub-display and vice versa1. PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Thisdisplaysthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]screenintheon-screenmenu.

2. Select[PICTURESWAP]usingthe▼/▲ buttons and then press the ENTER button.

Displaythescreenforswitchingthedisplaypositions.

3. Select[ON]usingthe▼ button and then press the ENTER button.

Thevideoofthemaindisplaywillswitchwiththatofthesub-display.

Whenturned“OFF” Whenturned“ON”

Sub-displayvideo

Maindisplayvideo Sub-displayvideo

Maindisplayvideo

ThesignaloutputfromtheHDMIOUTterminaldoesnotchangeevenifthedisplaypositionsareswitched.

4. Press the menu button.

Theon-screenmenuwilldisappear.

Page 76: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

61

Restrictions

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledonlyforthemaindisplay.

• Visualadjustments

• Videomagnification/demaginificationusingthepartialD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttons.

However,magnification/demaginificationisuptotheboundarysetin[PICTUREBYPICTURE].

• TESTPATTERN

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledforboththemaindisplayandsub-display.Theseoperationscannotbeap-pliedindividually.

• Momentarydeletionofvideo

• Videopause

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhena3Dvideoisbeingdisplayed.

• Whenusingthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]function,[CLOSEDCAPTION]and[DYNAMICCONTRAST]canbeused.

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhenthesignalinputhasaresolutionof1920×1080ormore.

• TheHDMIOUTterminalhasarepeaterfunction.Theoutputresolutionislimitedbythemaximumresolutionoftheconnectedmonitorandprojector.

Page 77: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

62

❸ Displaying a Picture Using [EDGE BLENDING]Ahighresolutionvideocanbeprojectedonanevenbiggerscreenbycombiningmultipleprojectorsontheleft,right,topandbottom.Thisprojectorisequippedwithan“EDGEBLENDINGFunction”thatmakestheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenindistinguishable.

NOTE:• Forprojectorthrowdistances,referto“Throwdistanceandscreensize”onpage156.• BeforeperformingtheEdgeBlendingfunction,placetheprojectorinthecorrectpositionsothattheimagebecomessquareintheappropriatesize,andthenmakeopticaladjustments(lensshift,focus,andzoom).

• Adjustthebrightnessofeachprojectorusing[ADJUST]under[LIGHTMODE].Afteradjustingthebrightness,youcankeepthesetbrightnesslevelbyturningONthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode.Inaddition,use[REF.WHITEBALANCE]toadjustthe[CONTRAST]and[BRIGHTNESS].

BeforeexplaininguseoftheEdgeBlendingfunctionThissectionexplainsthecasefor“Example:Placingtwoprojectorssidebyside”.Asshown,theprojectedimageontheleftisreferredtoas“ProjectorA”andtheprojectedimageontherightisreferredto“ProjectorB”.Unlessotherwisespecifiedhereinafter,the“projector”isusedtomeanbothAandB.

Example:Placingtwoprojectorssidebyside

EdgeBlendingarea

Projectedarea Projectedarea

ProjectorA ProjectorB

Page 78: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

63

Preparation:• Turnontheprojectoranddisplayasignal.• Whenperformingsettingsoradjustmentsusingtheremotecontrol,enablethe[CONTROLID]soasnottoactivatetheotherprojectors.(→page113)

Setting the overlap of projection screens

①Enable[EDGEBLENDING].1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Select[EDGEBLENDING].

The[EDGEBLENDING]screenwillbedisplayed.Alignthecursorwith[MODE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.Themodescreenwillbedisplayed.

3. Select[MODE]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThisenablestheEdgeBlendingfunction.Thefollowingmenuitemsareavailable:

[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT],[RIGHT],and[BLACKLEVEL]

4. Select[RIGHT]forProjectorAand[LEFT]forProjectorB.

PresstheENTERbutton.

Thefollowingitemsareavailable:

[CONTROL],[MARKER],[RANGE],and[POSITION]

Page 79: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

64

5. Select[CONTROL]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Each[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT],[RIGHT],and[BLACKLEVEL]hasitsown[CONTROL],[MARKER],[RANGE],and[POSITION].

• ForProjectorA,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[LEFT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].SimilarlyforProjectorB,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[RIGHT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].

②Adjust[RANGE]and[POSITION]todetermineanareaofoverlappededgesofimagesprojected from each projector.Turningon[MARKER]willdisplaymarkersinmagentaandgreen.Themagentamarkerisusedfor[RANGE]andgreenonefor[POSITION].

[RANGE](Determineanareaofoverlappededgesofimages.)

[POSITION](Determinethepositionofoverlappededgesofimages.)Greenmarker

Turnon[RIGHT]

Magentamarker

Turnon[LEFT]

Magentamarker

* The2screensareseparatedinthediagramforexplanatorypurposes.

Page 80: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

65

1 Adjust[RANGE].

Usethe◀or▶buttontoadjusttheoverlappedarea.

TIP:• Adjusttooverlaponeprojector’markerwiththeotherprojector’smarker.

2 Adjust[POSITION].

Usethe◀or▶buttontoalignoneedgewiththeotheredgeofoverlappedimages.

TIP:• Whendisplayingasignalwithadifferentresolution,performtheEdgeBlendingfunctionfromthestart.• Settingof[MARKER]willnotbesavedandreturnto[OFF]whentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Todisplayorhidethemarkerwhiletheprojectorisrunning,turnonoroff[MARKER]fromthemenu.

Page 81: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

66

Black Level AdjustmentThisadjuststheblackleveloftheoverlappingareaandthenon-overlappingareaofthemulti-screen(EDGEBLENDING).Adjustthebrightnesslevelifyoufeelthedifferenceistoolarge.

NOTE: Thisfunctionisenabledonlywhen[MODE]isturnedon.Adjustableareavariesdependingonwhatcombinationof[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT]and[RIGHT]areturnedon.

Example:AdjustingtheBlackLevelwhenplacingtwoprojectorssidebyside

Widthofoverlap

Adjust[CENTER] Adjust[CENTER]

ProjectorA’simage

ProjectorB’simage

Adjust[CENTER-RIGHT] Adjust[CENTER-LEFT]

1. Turnon[MODE]

2. Select[BLACKLEVEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thescreenwillswitchtotheblackleveladjustmentscreen.

3. Use the ▼ or ▲ button to select an item and use the ◀ or ▶ to adjust the black level.

Dothisfortheotherprojectorifnecessary.

Page 82: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

4. Multi-Screen Projection

67

9-segmentedportionsforBlackLeveladjustmentThecenterprojector

Thisfunctionadjuststhebrightnesslevelof9-segmentedportionsforthecenterprojectorand4-segmentedportionsfortheleftbottomprojectorasshownbelow.

TOP-LEFT

BOTTOM-LEFT

CENTER-LEFT

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

BOTTOM-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

CENTER

CENTER

BOTTOM-CENTER

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

TIP:• Thenumberofblackleveldivisionscreens(maximumofninedivisions)changesdependingonthenumberofedgeblendingpositionsselected(top,bottom,right,left).Inaddition,whenthetop/bottomandleft/rightendsareselected,thecornerdivisionscreen appears.

• Theedgeblendingwidthisthewidthsetintherangeandthecornerisformedbytheintersectingareaofthetop/bottomendsor left / right ends.

• The[BLACKLEVEL]canbeadjustedtomakeitbrighteronly.

Page 83: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

68

5. Using On-Screen Menu❶ Using the Menus

NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly depending on input signal and the projector setting.

1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.

NOTE: The commands such as ENTER,EXIT,▲▼, ◀▶ in the bottom show available buttons for your operation.

2. Press the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.

3. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the top item or the first tab.

4. Use the ▲▼ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or set.

You can use the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want.

5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window.

6. Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthe▲▼◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet.

Changesarestoreduntiladjustedagain.

7. Repeat steps 2-6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the projec-tor cabinet to quit the menu display.

NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.

8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.

To return to the previous menu, press the EXIT button.

Page 84: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

69

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Elements

Slidebar

Solidtriangle

Menumode

Tab

Radiobutton

LIGHTMODEsymbol

Menuwindowsordialogboxestypicallyhavethefollowingelements:

Highlight ............................. Indicates the selected menu or item. Solid triangle ...................... Indicates further choices are available. A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active. Tab ...................................... Indicates a group of features in a dialog box. Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front.Radio button .......................Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box.Source ................................ Indicates the currently selected source.Menu mode ........................ Indicates the current menu mode: BASIC or ADVANCED.Off Timer remaining time .... Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset.Slide bar ............................. Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment.LIGHT MODE symbol .......... Indicates [LIGHT MODE] is set.Key Lock symbol ................ Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled.Thermometer symbol ......... Indicates the [LIGHT MODE] is forcibly set to [ECO] mode because the internal temperature is too

high.HIGH symbol ...................... Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH] mode.

Source

Availablebuttons

Thermometersymbol

KeyLocksymbol

OffTimerremainingtime

Highlight

Page 85: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

70

5. Using On-Screen Menu

* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*3 When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],the[COLORTEMPERATURE]isnotavailable.

•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.❷ List of Menu ItemsSomemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.Menu Item Default Options

INPUT

HDMI *DisplayPort *BNC *BNC(CV) *BNC(Y/C) *COMPUTER *HDBaseTSLOTENTRY LISTTEST PATTERN

ADJUST

PICTURE

MODE STANDARD STANDARD, PROFESSIONAL

PRESET * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM.

DETAIL SETTINGS

GENERAL

REFERENCE * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM.

GAMMA CORRECTION*1 SELECT DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAILNATURAL SETTING

SCREEN SIZE*2 * LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALLCOLOR TEMPERATURE*3 *DYNAMIC CONTRAST * OFF, MOTION IMAGE, STILL IMAGE

WHITE BALANCECONTRAST R 0CONTRAST G 0CONTRAST B 0BRIGHTNESS R 0BRIGHTNESS G 0BRIGHTNESS B 0

COLOR CORRECTIONRED 0GREEN 0BLUE 0YELLOW 0MAGENTA 0CYAN 0

CONTRAST 50BRIGHTNESS 50SHARPNESS 10COLOR 50HUE 0RESET

IMAGE OPTIONS

CLOCK *PHASE *HORIZONTAL *VERTICAL *BLANKING * TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHTOVERSCAN AUTO AUTO, 0[%], 5[%], 10[%]

ASPECT RATIO

AUTO (COMPUTER) AUTO, 4:3, 5:4, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, NATIVE

AUTO (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO) AUTO, 4:3, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, ZOOM

AUTO (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO) AUTO, 4:3 WINDOW, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, FULL

INPUT RESOLUTION * –

VIDEO

NOISE REDUCTIONRANDOM NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHMOSQUITO NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHBLOCK NR OFF OFF, LOW

DEINTERLACE NORMAL NORMAL, MOVIE, STILLCONTRAST ENHANCEMENT

MODE AUTO OFF, AUTO, NORMALGAIN

SIGNAL TYPE AUTO AUTO, RGB, COMPONENTVIDEO LEVEL AUTO AUTO, NORMAL, ENHANCED, SUPER WHITE

3D SETTINGS

STEREO VIEWER SINGLE, DUAL LEFT, DUAL RIGHT

FORMAT AUTOAUTO, OFF(2D), FRAME PACKING, SIDE BY SIDE(HALF), SIDE BY SIDE(FULL), TOP AND BOTTOM, FRAME ALTERNATIVE, LINE ALTERNATIVE

L/R INVERT OFF OFF, ON

LENS MEMORY

STOREMOVERESET

Page 86: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

71

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

DISPLAY

PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE

SUB INPUT OFF OFF, HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

MODE PIP PIP, PICTURE BY PICTUREPICTURE SWAP OFF OFF, ON

PIP SETTING

START POSITION TOP-LEFT TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-RIGHTHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITIONSIZE MEDIUM LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALL

BORDER

GEOMETRIC CORRECTION

KEYSTONE

HORIZONTALVERTICALTILTTHROW RATIO

CORNERSTONE TOP-LEFT, TOP-CENTER, TOP-RIGHT, CENTER-LEFT, CENTER-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-CENTER, BOTTOM-RIGHT

HORIZONTAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP-CENTER, TOP-RIGHT, CENTER-LEFT, CENTER-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-CENTER, BOTTOM-RIGHT

VERTICAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP-CENTER, TOP-RIGHT, CENTER-LEFT, CENTER-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-CENTER, BOTTOM-RIGHT

PINCUSHION TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHTPC TOOL OFF OFF, 1, 2, 3RESET

EDGE BLENDING

MODE OFF OFF, ON

TOP

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER OFF OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

BOTTOM

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER OFF OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

LEFT

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER OFF OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

RIGHT

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER OFF OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

BLACK LEVEL

TOP-LEFTTOP-CENTERTOP-RIGHTCENTER-LEFTCENTERCENTER-RIGHTBOTTOM-LEFTBOTTOM-CENTERBOTTOM-RIGHT

MULTI SCREEN

WHITE BALANCE

MODE OFF OFF, ONCONTRAST WCONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS WBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS B

PICTURE SETTING

MODE OFF OFF, ZOOM, TILING

ZOOM

HORIZONTAL ZOOMVERTICAL ZOOMHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITION

TILING

WIDTH 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHEIGHT 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHORIZONTAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNITVERTICAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT

Page 87: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

72

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP

MENU

LANGUAGE ENGLISH

ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO, ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA, 日本語DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI, NEDERLANDS, SUOMINORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ, , Ελληνικά, 中文, 한국어ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, हिन्दी, ไทย,

, 繁體中文COLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROMEINPUT DISPLAY ON OFF, ONMESSAGE DISPLAY ON OFF, ONID DISPLAY ON OFF, ON3D CAUTION MESSAGE ON OFF, ON

DISPLAY TIME AUTO 45 SEC MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC

FILTER MESSAGE OFF OFF, 100[H], 500[H], 1000[H], 2000[H], 5000[H], 10000[H], 20000[H]

INSTALLATION

ORIENTATION DESKTOP FRONT

DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR, CEILING FRONT

SCREEN TYPE FREE FREE, 4:3 SCREEN, 16:9 SCREEN, 16:10 SCREEN

WALL COLOR OFFOFF, WHITEBOARD, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD (GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK

FAN MODE AUTO AUTO, HIGH

LIGHT MODELIGHT MODE NORMAL NORMAL, ECO1, ECO2, LONG LIFECONSTANT BRIGHTNESS OFF OFF, ONADJUST 30–100%

SHUTTER SETTINGS

POWER ON SHUTTER OPEN OPEN, CLOSEPICTURE MUTE SHUTTER OPEN OPEN, CLOSEFADE IN TIME 0–10 SECFADE OUT TIME 0–10 SEC

REF. WHITE BALANCE

CONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS BUNIFORMITY RUNIFORMITY B

REF. LENS MEMORY

PROFILE 1 1, 2STOREMOVERESETLOAD BY SIGNAL OFF OFF, ONFORCED MUTE OFF OFF, ON

LENS CALIBRATION

Page 88: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

73

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP CONTROL

TOOLS

ADMINISTRA-TOR MODE

MENU MODE ADVANCED ADVANCED, BASICNOT SAVE SETTING VALUES OFF OFF, ONNEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

PROGRAM TIMER

ENABLE OFF OFF, ON

SETTINGS

EDIT

ACTIVE OFF, ON

DAY SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, MON-FRI, MON-SAT, EVERY DAY

TIMEFUNCTION POWER, INPUT, LIGHT MODEADVANCED SETTINGSPOWER OFF, ON

INPUT HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

LIGHT MODE NORMAL, ECO1, ECO2REPEAT OFF, ON

DELETEUPDOWNBACK

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

TIME ZONE SETTIMGS

GMT

-12:00, -11:30, -11:00, -10:30, -10:00, -09:30, -09:00, -08:30, -08:00, -07:30, -07:00, -06:30, -06:00, -05:30, -05:00, -04:30, -04:00, -03:30, -03:00, -02:30, -02:00, -01:30, -01:00, -00:30, 00:00, +00:30, +01:00, +01:30, +02:00, +02:30, +03:00, +03:30, +04:00, +04;30, +05:00, +05:30, +06:00, +06:30, +07:00, +07:30, +08:00, +08:30, +09:00, +09:30, +10:00, +10:30, +11:00, +11:30, +12:00, +12:30, +13:00

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

DATE MM/DD/YYYYTIME HH:MMINTERNET TIME SERVER OFF, ON

IP ADDRESSUPDATE

SUMMER TIME SETTINGS

ENABLE OFF, ONMON(START) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(START)FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEKSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(START)MON(EXIT) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(EXIT)FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEKSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(EXIT)TIME DIFFERENCE +01:00, +00:30, -00:30, -01:00

MOUSE (Note) Cannot be used for this device.CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ON

NOTIFICATION SETTINGSREAR LED ON OFF, ONBUZZER ON OFF, ON

SECURITY OFF OFF, ONCOMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps

CONTROL IDCONTROL ID NUMBER 1 1–254CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON

REMOTE SENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK, FRONT, BACK, HDBaseT

LENS TYPE WITH SENSOR WITH SENSOR, WITHOUT SENSOR

Page 89: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

74

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP

NETWORK SETTINGS

WIRED LAN

PROFILES DISABLE, PROFILE 1, PROFILE 2DHCP OFF, ONIP ADDRESS 192.168.0.10SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0GATEWAY 192.168.0.1AUTO DNS OFF, ONDNS CONFIGURATIONRECONNECT

PROJECTOR NAME PROJECTOR NAME PH1202HL Series

DOMAINHOST NAME necpjDOMAIN NAME

ALERT MAIL

ALERT MAIL OFF, ONHOST NAMEDOMAIN NAMESENDER'S ADDRESSSMTP SERVER NAMERECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 1RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 2RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 3TEST MAIL

NETWORK SERVICE

HTTP SERVER

NEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

PJLinkNEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

AMX BEACON OFF, ON

CRESTRON

ROOMVIEW OFF, ONCRESTRON CONTROL (ENABLE, CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS, IP ID)

SOURCE OPTIONS

AUTO ADJUST NORMAL OFF, NORMAL, FINE

COLOR SYSTEMBNC(VIDEO) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAMBNC(Y/C) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM

DEFAULT INPUT SELECT LAST LAST, AUTO, HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

SEAMLESS SWITCHING OFF OFF, ON

CLOSED CAPTION OFF OFF, CAPTION1, CAPTION2, CAPTION3, CAPTION4, TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4

BACKGROUND BLUE BLUE, BLACK, LOGO

POWER OPTIONS

STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, HDBaseT STANDBYDIRECT POWER ON OFF OFF, ONAUTO POWER ON SELECT OFF OFF, HDMI, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOTAUTO POWER OFF 1:00 OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:15, 0:20, 0:30, 1:00OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00

SLOT POWERPROJECTOR ON ON OFF, ONPROJECTOR STANDBY ENABLE DISABLE, ENABLE

RESET

CURRENT SIGNALALL DATAALL DATA (INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)CLEAR FILTER HOURS

Page 90: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

75

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

INFO.

USAGE TIMELIGHT HOURS USEDFILTER HOURS USEDTOTAL CARBON SAVINGS

SOURCE(1)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO.

SOURCE(2)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE3D FORMAT

SOURCE(3)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO.

SOURCE(4)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE3D FORMAT

WIRED LAN

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAYMAC ADDRESS

VERSION(1)FIRMWAREDATASUB-CPU

VERSION(2) FIRMWARE3

OTHERS

DATE TIMEPROJECTOR NAMEMODEL NO.SERIAL NUMBERCONTROL ID (when [CONTROL ID] is set)

CONDITIONSINTAKE TEMPERATUREEXHAUST TEMPERATUREATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

HDBaseT

SIGNAL QUALITYOPERATION MODELINK STATUSHDMI STATUS

Page 91: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

76

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❸ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INPUT]

HDMIThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheHDMIINterminal.

DisplayPortThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal.

BNCThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtothevideoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

BNC(CV)ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNC(CV)videoinputterminal.(Thisprojectsthecompositevideosignal.)

BNC(Y/C)ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNC(Y/C)videoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheS-videosignal.)

COMPUTERThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

HDBaseTProjectingtheHDBaseTorWIREDLANsignal.

SLOTProjectsthepictureviatheoptionalboard(soldseparately)insertedintotheSLOT.

ENTRY LISTDisplaysalistofsignals.Seethefollowingpages.

TEST PATTERNClosesthemenuandswitchestothetestpatternscreen.Selectthepatternusingthe◀▶buttons.

Page 92: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

77

5. Using On-Screen Menu

UsingtheEntryListWhenyousave[IMAGEOPTIONS]and[LENSMEMORY],theadjustedvaluesofthesignalareautomaticallysavedtotheprojector’s[ENTRYLIST].Whenneeded,thestoredsignaladjustedvaluescanbeaccessedfromthe[ENTRYLIST].However,onlyupto100patternscanberegisteredintheEntryList.When100patternshavebeenregisteredintheEntryList,anerrormessageisthendisplayedandnoadditionalpatternscanberegistered.Youshouldthusdelete(adjustmentvaluesof)signalsthatarenolongerneeded.

DisplayingtheEntrylist1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[INPUT].

TheINPUTlistwillbedisplayed.

3. Use the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼toselect[ENTRYLIST]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheENTRYLISTwindowswillbedisplayed.

IftheENTRYLISTwindowisnotdisplayed,switchthemenuto[ADVANCED].

Toswitchthemenubetween[ADVANCED]and[BASIC],select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[TOOLS]→[ADMIN-ISTRATORMODE]→[MENUMODE].(→page107)

Page 93: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

78

5. Using On-Screen Menu

EnteringthecurrentlyprojectedsignalintotheEntryList[STORE]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select any number.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

CallingupasignalfromtheEntryList[LOAD]Pressthe▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalandpresstheENTERbutton.

EditingasignalfromtheEntryList[EDIT]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to edit.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[EDIT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheEditwindowwillbedisplayed.

SOURCENAME Enterasignalname.Upto18alphanumericcharacterscanbeused.INPUT Theinputterminalcanbechanged.SwitchingbetweenHDMI/DisplayPort/BNC/BNC(CV)/

BNC(Y/C)/Computer/HDBaseT/SLOTispossible.LOCK Setso that theselectedsignalcannotbedeletedwhen [ALLDELETE] isexecuted.The

changesmadeafterLOCKexecutioncannotbesaved.SKIP Setsothattheselectedsignalwillbeskippedduringautosearch.

3. Settheaboveitemsandselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The input terminal cannot be changed to the currently projected signal.

Page 94: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

79

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CuttingasignalfromtheEntryList[CUT]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to delete.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[CUT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThesignalwillbedeletedfromtheEntryListandthedeletedsignalwillbedisplayedontheclipboardatthebottomoftheEntryList.

NOTE:• Thecurrentlyprojectedsignalcannotbedeleted.• Whenthelockedsignalisselected,itwillbedisplayedingraywhichindicatesitisnotavailable.

TIP:• DataontheclipboardcanbepassedontotheEntryList.• DataontheclipboardwillnotbelostaftertheEntryListisclosed.

CopyingandpastingasignalfromtheEntryList[COPY]/[PASTE]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to copy.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[COPY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThecopiedsignalwillbedisplayedontheclipboardatthebottomoftheEntryList.

3. Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the list.

4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal.

5. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[PASTE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Dataontheclipboardwillbepastedtothesignal.

DeletingallthesignalsfromtheEntryList[ALLDELTE]

1. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ALLDELETE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationmessagewillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The locked signal cannot be deleted.

Page 95: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

80

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❹ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST][PICTURE]

[MODE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutodeterminehowtosavesettingsfor[DETAILSETTINGS]of[PRESET]foreachinput.

STANDARD ............ Saves settings for each item of [PRESET] (Preset 1 through 7)PROFESSIONAL ..... Saves all the settings of [PICTURE] for each input.

NOTE: • When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[MODE]cannotbeselected.

[PRESET]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.Therearesevenfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]tosetuseradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].

HIGH-BRIGHT ........ Recommended for use in a brightly lit room.PRESENTATION ..... Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file.VIDEO .................... Recommended for typical TV program viewing.MOVIE ................... Recommended for movies.GRAPHIC ............... Recommended for graphics.sRGB ..................... Standard color valuesDICOM SIM. .......... Recommended for DICOM simulation format.

NOTE: • The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA).

Thestandardspecifieshowdigitalimagedatacanbemovedfromsystemtosystem.• Adjustmentmaynotworkdependingoninputsignal.

Page 96: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

81

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[DETAILSETTINGS]

[GENERAL]StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERATURE].

HIGH-BRIGHT ........ Recommended for use in a brightly lit room.PRESENTATION ..... Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file.VIDEO .................... Recommended for typical TV program viewing.MOVIE ................... Recommended for movies.GRAPHIC ............... Recommended for graphics.sRGB ..................... Standard color values.DICOM SIM. .......... Recommended for DICOM simulation format.

SelectingGammaCorrectionMode[GAMMACORRECTION]Eachmodeisrecommendedfor:

SELECT DYNAMIC Createsahigh-contrastpicture.NATURAL Standard settings.Settings can be adjusted to suit the picture being

projected.BLACKDETAIL Emphasizesdetailindarkareasofthepicture.

NATURALSETTING Afterselecting[NATURAL]youcanadjustthesettings.Adjustthemusingthe◀/▶buttons.

NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

SelectingScreenSizeforDICOMSIM[SCREENSIZE]Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.

LARGE ................... For screen size of 150"MEDIUM ................ For screen size of 100"SMALL ................... For screen size of 50"

NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

Page 97: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

82

5. Using On-Screen Menu

AdjustingColorTemperature[COLORTEMPERATURE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.Avaluebetween5000Kand10500Kcanbesetin100Kunits.

NOTE:When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.

AdjustingBrightnessandContrast[DYNAMICCONTRAST]Select[MOTIONIMAGE]or[STILLIMAGE]dependingonthepictureyouwishtoproject,andthecontrastrationwillbeadjustedtotheoptimumvalue.

NOTE:• Dependingontheconditions,projectorsettingssuchas[DYNAMICCONTRAST]maynotbeabletobeselected.

AdjustingWhiteBalance[WHITEBALANCE]Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.

[COLORCORRECTION]Correctsthecolorforallsignals.Adjuststhetoneforthecolorsred,green,blue,yellow,magentaandcyan.

RED HUE +Direction Magentadirection−Direction Yellowdirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

GREEN HUE +Direction Yellowdirection−Direction Cyandirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

BLUE HUE +Direction Cyandirection−Direction Magentadirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

YELLOW HUE +Direction Reddirection−Direction Greendirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

MAGENTA HUE +Direction Bluedirection−Direction Reddirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

CYAN HUE +Direction Greendirection−Direction Bluedirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

[CONTRAST]Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.

[BRIGHTNESS]Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.

[SHARPNESS]Controlsthedetailoftheimage.

[COLOR]Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.

Page 98: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

83

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[HUE]Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.

Inputsignal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE

RGBsystemof“COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI/HDBaseT”

Yes Yes Yes No No

COMPONENTsystemof“COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI/HDBaseT”

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

CompositeVideo/S-Video Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes=Adjustable,No=Notadjustable

NOTE:• When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[SHARPNESS],[COLOR]and[HUE]cannotbeadjusted.

[RESET]Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorysettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselectedwillnotbereset.

Page 99: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

84

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[IMAGE OPTIONS]

AdjustingClockandPhase[CLOCK/PHASE]ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.

CLOCK ................... Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear. This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image.This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.

PHASE ................... Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering.)Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete.

NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.

Page 100: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

85

5. Using On-Screen Menu

AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.

• Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.

• Theadjustments for [CLOCK], [PHASE], [HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestored inmemoryfor thecurrentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,itsadjustmentswillbecalledupandapplied.

Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]andresettheadjustments.

[BLANKING]Adjuststhedisplayrange(blanking)atthetop,bottom,leftandrightedgesoftheinputsignal.

SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]Selectoverscanpercentage(Auto,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.

Projectedimage

Overscanedby10%

NOTE: • The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable: -when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].

Page 101: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

86

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingtheAspectRatio[ASPECTRATIO]Usethisfunctiontoselectthescreen’svertical:horizontalaspectratio.Selectthescreentype(4:3screen,16:9screenor16:10screen)atthescreensettingbeforesettingtheaspectratio.(→page104)Theprojectorautomaticallyidentifiesthesignalbeinginputandsetstheoptimumaspectratio.

For Computer signal

ForComponent/Video/S-Videosignals

Whenthescreentypeissetto4:3 Whenthescreentypeissetto16:9or16:10

Resolution AspectRatioVGA 640×480 4:3SVGA 800×600 4:3XGA 1024×768 4:3WXGA 1280×768 15:9WXGA 1280×800 16:10HD(FWXGA) 1366×768 approx.16:9WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10SXGA 1280×1024 5:4SXGA+ 1400×1050 4:3WXGA++ 1600×900 16:9UXGA 1600×1200 4:3WSXGA+ 1680×1050 16:10FHD(1080P) 1920×1080 16:9WUXGA 1920×1200 16:10WQXGA 2560×1600 16:10

Options Function

AUTO Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspectratio.Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthisoccurs,selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.

4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.

5:4 Theimageisdisplayedin5:4aspectratio

16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio

15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio

16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio

Page 102: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

87

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Options Function

NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputersignalhasalowerorhigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.(→page164)Whentheincomingcomputersignalhasahigherresolutionthantheprojector'snativeresolution,thecenterofanimagewillbedisplayed.

LETTERBOX Theimageofaletterboxsignal(16:9)isstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirectionstofitthescreen.

WIDESCREEN Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.

ZOOM Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin4:3.Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenotvisible.

FULL Projecttofullscreensize.

TIP:• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspect

ratio for a vide source. Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formoviefilm.• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.

[INPUTRESOLUTION]TheresolutionisassignedautomaticallywhentheresolutionoftheinputsignalfromthecomputervideoinputterminalorBNCvideoinputterminal(analogRGB)cannotbedistinguished.

Page 103: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

88

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[VIDEO]

UsingNoiseReduction[NOISEREDUCTION]Whenprojectingavideoimage,youcanusethe[NOISEREDUCTION]functiontoreducethescreennoise(roughnessanddistortion).Thisdeviceisequippedwiththreetypesofnoisereductionfunctions.Selectthefunctionaccordingtothetypeofnoise.Dependingonthenoiselevel,thenoisereductioneffectcanbesetto[OFF],[LOW],[MEDIUM]or[HIGH].[NOISEREDUCTION]canbeselectedforSDTV,HDTVsignalandcomponentsignalinput.

RANDOM NR ......... Reduces flickering random noise in an image. MOSQUITO NR ...... Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during Blu-ray playback.BLOCK NR ............. Reduces block noise or mosaic-like patterns by selecting ON.

SelectingInterlacedProgressiveConversionProcessMode[DEINTERLACE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectaninterlaced-to-progressiveconversionprocessforvideosignals.

NORMAL ................ Automatically distinguishes a moving image from a static image to create a distinct image. Please select [MOVIE] if there are any obvious jitter and noises.

MOVIE ................... Select when projecting moving images. This is suitable for signals with a lot of jitter and noise.STILL ..................... Select when projecting static images. The video will flicker when a moving image is projected.

NOTE:ThisfunctionisnotavailablewithRGBsignals.

[CONTRASTENHANCEMENT]Usingthecharacteristicsofthehumaneye,apicturequalitywithasenseofcontrastandresolutionisachieved.

OFF ........................ Suite vision is switched off.AUTO ..................... Contrast and picture quality are automatically improved using the suite vision function.NORMAL ................ Adjust the gain manually.

Page 104: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

89

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SIGNALTYPE]SelectionofRGBandcomponentsignals.Normally,thisissetto[AUTO].Pleasechangethesettingifthecoloroftheimageremainsunnatural.

AUTO ..................... Automatically distinguishes RGB and component signals.RGB ....................... Switches to the RGB input.COMPONENT ......... Switches to the component signal input.

[VIDEOLEVEL]SelectionofthevideosignallevelwhenconnectinganexternaldevicetotheHDMIINterminal,DisplayPortinputterminal,andHDBaseTinputterminaloftheprojector.

AUTO ..................... The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal.Depending on the connected device, this setting may not be made properly. In this case, switch to [NORMAL” or “ENHANCED” from the menu and view with the optimum setting.

NORMAL ................ This disables the enhanced mode.ENHANCED ............ This improves the image’s contrast, expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically.SUPER WHITE ....... The video contrast is improved and the dark areas appear more dynamic.

Page 105: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

90

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3D SETTINGS]

Pleasereferto“3-11Projecting3Dvideos”(→page40)fortheoperation.

STEREOVIEWERAdjustingthesettingsforprojectinga3Dpicturewithoneormultipleprojectors.For3Dglassesright-eyeandleft-eyesettings,select[STEREOVIEWER].

SINGLE .................. Use a single projector to project 3D videos.DUAL LEFT ............ Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the left.DUAL RIGHT .......... Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the right.

FORMATSelectthe3Dvideoformat(recording/transmissionformat).Selecttomatchthe3Dbroadcastand3Dmedia.Nor-mally,[AUTO]isselected.Pleaseselectthe3Dinputsignalformatwhenthe3Ddetectionsignaloftheformatcannotbedistinguished.

L/RINVERTInvertthedisplayorderoftheleftandrightvideos.Select[ON]ifyoufeeluncomfortablewiththe3Ddisplaywhen[OFF]isselected.

Page 106: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

91

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Lens Memory Function [LENS MEMORY]

ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluesforeachinputsignalwhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFO-CUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.

STORE ................... Stores the current adjusted values in memory for each input signal.MOVE .................... Applies the adjusted values to the current signal.RESET .................... Returns the adjusted values to the last condition.

NOTE:• Thelensshift,zoom,andfocusadjustmentscanbeperformedwiththeremotecontrol.(→ page 23, 24)• Tostoreadjustedvaluescommontoalltheinputsources,usetheREF.LENSMEMORYfunction.Seepage49, 106.• LensmemoryadjustmentswillbeautomaticallyregisteredtheENTRYLIST.TheselensmemoryadjustmentscanbeloadedfromtheENTRYLIST.(→ page 78)

Notethatperforming[CUT]or[ALLDELETE]intheENTRYLISTwilldeletelensmemoryadjustmentsaswellassourceadjust-ments. This deletion will not take effect until other adjustments is loaded.

Page 107: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

92

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❺ Menu Descriptions & Functions [DISPLAY][PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

SUBINPUTSelecttheinputsignaltobedisplayedinthesub-display.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page58)fordetailsontheoperation.

MODESelecteitherPIPorPICTUREBYPICTUREwhenswitchingto2-screendisplay.

PICTURE SWAPThevideosinthemaindisplayandsub-displaywillbeswitched.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page58)fordetails.

PIP SETTINGSelectthedisplayposition,positionadjustmentandsizeofthesub-displayinthePIPscreen.

START POSITION ... Selection of the display position of the sub-display when switching to the PIP screen.HORIZONTAL POSITION .............................. Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the horizontal direction. The respective corners will serve

as reference points.VERTICAL POSITION .............................. Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the vertical direction. The respective corners will serve as

reference points.SIZE ....................... Select the display size of the sub-display.

Page 108: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

93

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIP:Thehorizontalpositionandverticalpositionaretheamountofmovementfromthereferencepoints.Forexample,whenTOP-LEFTis adjusted, the position is displayed with the same amount of movement even if displayed with other starting positions.Themaximumamountofmovementishalftheresolutionoftheprojector.

ReferencepointAdjustusingthehorizon-talposition

Sub-display Maindisplay

Referencepoint

Adjustusingtheverticalposition

TOP-LEFT TOP-RIGHT

BOTTOM-LEFT BOTTOM-RIGHT

ReferencepointReferencepoint

BORDERSelectthedisplayboundaryofthemaindisplayandsub-displayofthe[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screen.

Displayboundary

Maindisplay Sub-displayMaindisplay Sub-display MaindisplaySub-display

TIP:• 6stepscanbeselectedonthisprojector.

Page 109: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

94

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]

KEYSTONEDisplaythetrapezoidcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.Todisplaythe[KEYSTONE]screen,select[DISPLAY]→[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[KEYSTONE]intheon-screenmenu.The[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]screencanalsobedisplayedbypressingthe3DREFORMbuttonontheprojectororontheremotecontrol.

HORIZONTAL ......... Adjustments when projecting from a diagonal direction to the screen.

VERTICAL .............. Adjustments when projecting from the top or bottom direction to the screen.

TILT ....................... Adjusts the distortion when performing trapezoidal correction with the screen moved in the vertical direction using the lens shift.

THROW RATIO ....... Adjusts according to the projection ratio of the optional lens used.

Modelnameoflensunit

Adjustmentrange

NP-9LS12ZM1 12–19NP-9LS13ZM1 14–23NP-9LS16ZM1 17–29NP-9LS08ZM1 8–14

NOTE:• Whenpowerissuppliedtothedevice,theadjustmentvalueofthe[KEYSTONE]usedpreviouslyisretainedevenifthegradient

of the device is changed.• Whenclearingtheadjustmentvalueof[KEYSTONE],pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Whensettingother[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]functions,the[KEYSTONE]menucannotbeselected.Whenperformingtrapezoidalcorrection,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoresecondstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[GEOMETRICCORRECTION].

• Aselectricalcorrection iscarriedoutby [KEYSTONE], thebrightnessmaybe reducedor thescreenqualitymaydeterioratesometimes.

Page 110: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

95

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CORNERSTONEDisplaythe4-pointcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.Pleasereferto“CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page34)fordetailsontheoperation.

HORIZONTALCORNER/VERTICALCORNERDistortioncorrectionforcornerprojectionsuchaswallsurfaces.

HORIZONTAL CORNER .............................. Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the horizontal direction.

* Reverse angle correction is also possible.VERTICAL CORNER .............................. Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the vertical direction.

* Reverse angle correction is also possible.

NOTE:• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalangleas

the deterioration in the image quality increases as the distortion adjustment volume gets larger.• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweentheupperandlowerorleftandrightsidesandthecenterofthescreenforprojectionscuttingacrosscorners.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommendedfor projections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus.

Page 111: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

96

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Adjustment method1. Alignthecursorwiththe[HORIZONTALCORNER]or[VERTICALCORNER]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORREC-

TION]menuandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theadjustmentscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀▶ buttons to align the cursor (yellow box) with the target adjustment point and then press the ENTER button.

• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).

3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theadjustmentpointwillgobacktobeingacursor(yellowbox).

Explanationofscreentransition

• Theadjustmentpointsofthefourcorners(a,c,fandhinthedrawing)willmoveindependently.

• Thefollowingadjustmentpointsdifferatthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]and[VERTICALCORNER].

HORIZONTALCORNER:WhenPointbinthedrawingismoved,andtheuppersideandPointgaremoved,thelowersidewillmoveinaparallelmanner.

VERTICALCORNER:WhenPointdinthedrawingismoved,andtheleftsideandPointearemoved,therightsidewillmoveinaparallelmanner.

[Adjustmentpointsofthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]screenandmovementpointsoftheprojectionscreen]

a

b

b c

d e

f g h

a c

d e

fg

h

PointbwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsa,b,c

PointgwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsf,g,h

[Adjustmentpointsofthe[VERTICALCORNER]screenandmovementpointsoftheprojectionscreen]

a

a

b

bc

cd

dee

f

f

g

gh

h

PointdwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsa,d,f

PointewillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsf,g,h

4. StartfromStep2onwardstoadjusttheotherpoints.

5. When the adjustment is completed, press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursorwiththe[EXIT]intheadjustment screen and then press theENTER button.

• Switchtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuscreen.

Page 112: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

97

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PINCUSHIONAdjustthecurvedistortionoftheprojectionscreen.

TOP ........................ Adjust the curve distortion of the upper edge of the projection screen.

BOTTOM ................ Adjust the curve distortion of the lower edge of the projection screen.

LEFT ...................... Adjust the curve distortion of the left edge of the projection screen.RIGHT .................... Adjust the curve distortion of the right edge of the projection

screen.

TOP

LEFT RIGHT

BOTTOM

PC TOOL (For future support)Recallthegeometriccorrectiondatathatisregisteredintheprojectorbeforehand.Therearethreetypesofregistereddata.

NOTE:• KEYSTONE,CORNERSTONE,andPINCUSHIONcannotbeselectedwhensettingthegeometriccorrectionusingaPCtool.• Toclearthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]datathathasbeensetup,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Aselectricalcorrectioniscarriedout ingeometriccorrection,thebrightnessmaybeaffectedandthepicturequalitymaybe

degraded.

RESETResettheadjustmentvaluethathasbeensetupinGEOMETRICCORRECTION(returntotheinitialvalue).

Page 113: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

98

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[EDGE BLENDING]

Thisadjuststheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenwhenprojectinghighresolutionvideosusingacombina-tionofseveralprojectorsintheup,down,leftandrightpositions.

MODEThisenablesordisablestheEDGEBLENDINGfunction.WhenMODEissettoON,theTOP,BOTTOM,LEFT,RIGHTandBLACKLEVELsettingscanbeadjusted.

TOP/BOTTOM/LEFT/RIGHTThisselectstheEDGEBLENDINGlocationsontheleft,right,topandbottomonthescreen.Thefollowingsettingscanbeadjustedwhenanitemisselected.(→page63)

CONTROL .............. Enable TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT and RIGHT functions.MARKER ................ Set whether to display marker or not when adjusting the range and display position. When turned on, a

magenta marker for adjusting the range adjustment and a green marker for adjusting the display position will be displayed.

RANGE ................... Adjust the range (width) of the edge blending.POSITION .............. Adjust the display position of the edge blending.

BLACKLEVELDividethescreenintoninepartsandkeeptheblackleveluniformforeachprojector.TheninedivisionsscreensareTOP-LEFT,TOP-CENTER,TOP-RIGHT,CENTER-LEFT,CENTER,CENTER-RIGHT,BOTTOM-LEFT,BOTTOM-CENTERandBOTTOM-RIGHT.(→page66)

Page 114: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

99

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[MULTI SCREEN]

WHITEBALANCEThisadjuststhewhitebalanceforeachprojectorwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Thiscanbeadjustedwhen[MODE]issetto[ON].

BRIGHTNESS W, BRIGHTNESS R, BRIGHTNESS G, BRIGHTNESS B .............................. Adjusting the black color of the video.CONTRAST W, CONTRAST R, CONTRAST G, CONTRAST B .............................. Adjusting the white color of the video.

PICTURE SETTINGThissetsthedivisionconditionwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Pleasereferto“4.Multi-ScreenProjection”(→page54)fordetails.

MODE OFF Usetheprojectorinastandalonestate.

ZOOM Thisadjuststhepositionandwidthofthevideoareathatyouwishtodivide.Theedgeblendingwidthwillalsobeautomaticallysettothatwidth.

TILING Thisassignsthedividedscreenstotheprojectors.Theedgeblendingfunctionwillalsobesetautomatically.

ZOOM HORIZONTALZOOM

Thismaginifiesthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALZOOM

Thismaginifiesthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

HORIZONTALPOSITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALPO-SITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

TILING WIDTH Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedhorizontally.

HEIGHT Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedvertically.

HORIZONTALPOSITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromtheleftamongthosearrangedhorizontally.

VERTICALPO-SITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromthetopamongthosearrangedvertically.

Page 115: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

100

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Conditions for using tiling• Alltheprojectorsneedtofulfilthefollowingconditions.• Thepanelsizemustbethesame• Theprojectionscreensizemustbethesame• Theleftandrightendsortopandbottomendsoftheprojectionscreenmustbeconsistent.• Thesettingsfortheleftandrightedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame• Thesettingsforthetopandbottomedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame Ifthetilingconditionsaresatisfied,thevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionwillbeautomaticallyextractedandprojected. Ifthetilingconditionsarenotsatisfied,adjustthevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionusingthezoomfunction.• AssignauniquecontrolIDtoeachprojector.• Setthe“ColorSetting”and“DeepColorSetting”onyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerto“Auto”.Refertotheowner’smanualaccompanyingyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerformoreinformation. ConnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputertothefirstprojector.ThenconnecttotheHDMIINinputterminalofthesecondandsubsequenttiledprojectors.

Tilingsettingexample)Numberofhorizontalunits=2,Numberofverticalunits=2

Horizontalorder=SecondunitVerticalorder=Firstunit

Page 116: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

101

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❻ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]

[MENU]

SelectingMenuLanguage[LANGUAGE]Youcanchooseoneof29languagesforon-screeninstructions.

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingMenuColor[COLORSELECT]Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.

TurningOn/OffSourceDisplay[INPUTDISPLAY]ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasHDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,BNC(CV),BNC(Y/C),COMPUTER,HDBaseTtobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.

Turningmessagesonandoff[MESSAGEDISPLAY]Thisoptionselectswhetherornottodisplayprojectormessagesatthebottomoftheprojectedimage.Evenwhen“OFF”isselected,thesecuritylockwarningisdisplayed.Thesecuritylockwarningturnsoffwhenthesecuritylockiscanceled.

TurningON/OFFControlID[IDDISPLAY]ID DISPLAY ........... This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control

is pressed. (→ page 113)

Page 117: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

102

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3DCAUTIONMESSAGE]Thisselectswhethertodisplayacautionmessageornotwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo.ThedefaultconditionwhenshippedfromthefactoryisON.

OFF ........................ The 3D caution message screen will not be displayed.ON ......................... The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a 3D video. Press the ENTER button

to cancel the message.• Themessagewilldisappearautomaticallyafter60secondsorwhenotherbuttonsarepressed.Ifitdisap-

pears automatically, the 3D caution message will be displayed again when switching to a 3D video.

SelectingMenuDisplayTime[DISPLAYTIME]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.Thepresetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefac-torypreset.

SelectingIntervalTimeforFilterMessage[FILTERMESSAGE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthetimepreferencebetweendisplayingthemessageforcleaningthefilters.Cleanthefilterwhenyougetthemessage“PLEASECLEANFILTER.”(→page142)Eightoptionsareavailable:OFF,100[H],500[H],1000[H],2000[H],5000[H],10000[H],20000[H]Thedefaultsettingis[OFF].

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 118: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

103

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[INSTALLATION]

SelectingProjectorOrientation[ORIENTATION]Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.

NOTE: • Pleaseconsultthedealerifyourequirespecialinstallationservicese.g.whenmountingtheprojectortoaceiling.Neverinstall

the projector on your own. This may result in the projector falling down and causing injury to people.

DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR

DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT

Page 119: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

104

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingAspectRatioandPositionforScreen[SCREENTYPE]

Screentype Setstheaspectratiooftheprojectionscreen.

FREE Theratioofpanelisselected.Selectthiswhenprojectingmulti-screenand17:9screen(2K).

4:3screen Forascreenwitha4:3aspectratio

16:9screen Forascreenwitha16:9aspectratio

16:10screen Forascreenwitha16:10aspectratio

NOTE:• Afterchangingthescreentype,checkthesettingof[ASPECTRATIO]inthemenu.(→ page 86)

UsingtheWallColorCorrection[WALLCOLOR]

Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.

SelectingFanMode[FANMODE]FanModeisusedtosetthespeedoftheinternalcoolingfan.

MODE .................... Select either AUTO or HIGH.AUTO: The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature.HIGH: The built-in fans run at a high speed.

NOTE: • Makesurethespeedissetto[HIGH]whenyouareusingthisdevicecontinuouslyforseveraldays.• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 120: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

105

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[LIGHTMODE]Adjusting theenergysavingssettingsand thebrightnessofeachprojector inmulti-screenprojection.Forenergysavingssettings,seepage31“3-8.ChangingLIGHTMODE/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingLIGHTMODE[LIGHTMODE]”.

LIGHTMODE NORMAL Thelightmoduleluminance(brightness)willbecome100%andthescreenwillturnbright.

ECO1 Bycontrollingthebrightnessandfanspeedaccordingtotheselectedsetting,energycanbesavedandmotionnoiseandthepowerconsumptioncanbelowered.

ECO2

LONGLIFE Lightmodulelifeisthepriorityinthismode.Thelightmoduleluminance(brightness)isloweredaround90%.

CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS

OFF [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modewillbecanceled.

ON Maintainsthebrightnessthatisineffectatthetime[ON]isselected.Unless[OFF]isse-lected,thesamesettingswillremainineffectevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Tore-adjustthebrightness,firstturnthissettingOFFbeforemakingfurtheradjustments.

NOTE:• [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeisafunctionusedtomaintainthebrightnessataconstantlevel.Colorwillnotbefixed.

ADJUST Brightnesscanbeadjustedin1%incrementsfrom30to100%.Whenseveralprojectorsareusedformulti-screenprojection,thebrightnesscanbead-justedindividuallyoneachprojector.

NOTE:• When[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeisset[ON],[LIGHTMODE]and[ADJUST]arenoteffective.

TIP:• Brightnessnormallydecreaseswithuse,butbyselecting[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode,sensorsinsidetheprojectordetect

brightness and automatically adjust the output, thereby maintaining a constant brightness throughout the life of the light module. However,ifoutputisalreadyatitsmaximum,brightnesswilldecreasewithuse. Forthisreason,whenusingmulti-screenprojection,itisrecommendedtoadjustthebrightnesstoaslightlylowerlevel,thensettingthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeto[ON].

[SHUTTERSETTINGS]Enablinganddisablingthelensshutterfunction.YoucanalsosethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeinandfadeoutwhentheSHUTTERbuttonispressed.

POWERONSHUTTER

OPEN When thepower is turnedon, the lightsourcecomesonand thepicture isprojected.

CLOSE Thelightsourcedoesnotcomeonwhenthepoweristurnedon.WhentheSHUTTERbuttonispressed,theshutter isreleasedandthelightsourceisturnedon.

PICTUREMUTESHUTTER

OPEN Thelightsourceisstillonwhenthepictureisturnedoffforswitchingtheinputterminals.

CLOSE Thelightsourceturnsoffwhenthepictureisturnedoffforswitchingtheinputterminals.

FADEINTIME SethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeinaftertheSHUTTERbuttonispressed.Thetimecanbesetfrom0to10secondsinincrementsof1second.

FADEOUTTIME SethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeoutaftertheSHUTTERbuttonispressed.Thetimecanbesetfrom0to10secondsinincrementsof1second.

Page 121: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

106

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[REF.WHITEBALANCE]Thisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalanceforallsignals.Thewhiteandblacklevelsofthesignalareadjustedforoptimumcolorreproduction.Uniformityisalsoadjustedwhentheredness(R)andblueness(B)ofthewhitecolorinthescreen’shorizontal(left/right)directionareuneven.

CONTRAST R/CONTRAST G/CONTRAST B .............................. These adjust the picture’s white color.BRIGHTNESS R/BRIGHTNESS G/BRIGHTNESS B .............................. These adjust the picture’s black color.UNIFORMITY R ...... The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the redness on the left side of the picture (increasing

towards the left edge) and the weaker the redness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the right edge).This is reversed when set to the − side.

UNIFORMITY B ...... The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the blueness on the left side of the picture (increasing towards the left edge) and the weaker the blueness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the right edge).This is reversed when set to the − side.

UsingtheReferenceLensMemoryFunction[REF.LENSMEMORY]ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluescommontoallinputsourceswhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojectorortheremotecontrol.Theadjustedvaluesstoredinmemorycanbeusedasareferencetothecurrent.

PROFILE ................ Select a stored [PROFILE] number.STORE ................... Stores the current adjusted values in memory as a reference.MOVE .................... Applies the adjusted reference values stored in [STORE] to the current signal.RESET .................... Reset selected [PROFILE] number [REF. LENS MEMORY] to the factory default settings.LOAD BY SIGNAL .. When you switch signals the lens will shift to the lens shift, zoom, and focus values for the selected [PRO-

FILE] number.If no adjusted values have been saved to [LENS MEMORY], the lens will apply [REF. LENS MEMORY] adjusted values. Alternatively, if no adjusted values have been saved to [REF. LENS MEMORY], the unit will return to factory default settings.

FORCED MUTE ...... To turn off the image during lens shift, select [YES].

NOTE:• Adjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]willnotbereturnedtodefaultwhenperforming[CURRENTSIGNAL]or[ALLDATA]for[RESET]fromthemenu.

• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 49, 91)• When[PICTUREMUTESHUTTER]under[SHUTTERSETTINGS]is[ON],[FORCEDMUTE]willturnoffthelightsourceandstopprojection.(→ previous page)

[LENSCALIBRATION]Theadjustmentrangeofthezoomandfocusofthe[LENSMEMORY]iscalibrated.TheSHUTTERindicatorflashesingreenwhen[LENSCALIBRATION]isbeingexecuted.Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.

Page 122: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

107

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[CONTROL]

TOOLS

ADMINISTRATORMODEThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.

MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.(→page70)

NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES

Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings.Clear this check box to save your projector settings.

NEWPASSWORD/CONFIRMPASS-WORD

Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumericcharacters

Page 123: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

108

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROGRAMTIMER

Thisoption turnson/standby theprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsECOmodeautomaticallyataspecifiedtime.

NOTE:• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→ page 111) MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected. The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about two weeks after the main power is turned off. If the main powerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorfortwoweeksormore,itrequirestoset[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS]featureagain.

Setting a new program timer1. On the PROGRAM TIMER screen, use the ▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROGRAMLIST]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Select a blank program number and press the ENTER button.

The[EDIT]screenwillbedisplayed.

3. Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.

ACTIVE .................. Place a check mark to enable the program.DAY ........................ Select days of the week for the program timer. To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-

FRI]. To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY].

Page 124: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

109

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIME ...................... Set the time to execute the program. Enter time in 24-hour format.FUNCTION ............. Select a function to be executed. Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting

[ADVANCED SETTINGS]. Selecting [INPUT] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED SETTINGS]. Selecting [LIGHT MODE] will allow you to select [LIGHT MODE] by setting [ADVANCED SET-TINGS].

ADVANCED SETTINGS .............................. Select power on/off, a type of video source, or LIGHT MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION].REPEAT .................. Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis. To use the program this week only, clear the

check mark.

4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillcompletethesettings.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.

5. Select[BACK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.

6. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[TOOLS]screen.

NOTE:• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingisignored.• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe

cleared automatically and the program will be disabled.• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.• Twodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted

until the power off becomes possible.• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris

enabled.• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoit

manually so as not to leave the projector on for a long period of time.

Page 125: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

110

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Activating the program timer

1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.

Theselectionscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[ON]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

Returntothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.

NOTE:• Whentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]havenotbeensetto[ON],theprogramwillnotbeexecutedevenifthe[ACTIVE]itemsintheprogramlisthavebeenticked.

• Evenwhentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]aresetto[ON],the[PROGRAMTIMER]willnotworkuntilthe[PRO-GRAMTIMER]screenisclosed.

Changing the programmed settings

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.

2. Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.

3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theprogrammedsettingswillbechanged.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.

Changing the order of programs

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.

Theorderoftheprogramswillbechanged.

Deleting the programs

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[DELETE].

3. Press the ENTER button.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theprogramwillbedeleted.

Thiswillcompletedeletingtheprogram.

Page 126: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

111

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DATEANDTIMESETTINGS

Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.NOTE: The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about 2 weeks after the main power is turned off. If the main power is off for 2 weeks or more, the built-in clock will cease. If the built-in clock ceases, set the date and time again. The built-in clock will not cease while in the standby mode.

TIME ZONE SETTINGS .............. Select your time zone.DATE AND TIME SETTINGS ...... Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM). INTERNET TIME SERVER ......... If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be synchronized with an Internet

time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup.UPDATE .................................... Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately. The UPDATE button is not available

unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on.SUMMER TIME SETTINGS ....... If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled.

[MOUSE]Thisfunctioncannotbeusedinthisdevice.Itisusedforfutureexpansionpurposesonly.

Page 127: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

112

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DisablingtheCabinetButtons[CONTROLPANELLOCK]ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.

NOTE:• Howtocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK] Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]issetto[ON],presseithertheKEYLOCKbuttonontheprojectorover1secondortheSOURCEbuttonover10secondstocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK].

TIP:• Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.

[NOTIFICATIONSETTINGS]Thissettingistoenable/disablethenotificationbythebuzzerandrearLED.

REARLED OFF [REARLED]isdeactivated.

ON The[REARLED]informsyouoftheunit’sstatusjustlikethestatusindicator.

BUZZER OFF Thebuzzergoesoff

ON Thebuzzerstops.

EnablingSecurity[SECURITY]ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page37)

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingCommunicationSpeed[COMMUNICATIONSPEED]ThisfeaturesetsthebaudrateofthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Itsupportsdataratesfrom4800to115200bps.Thedefaultis38400bps.Selecttheappropriatebaudrateforyourequipmenttobeconnected(dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns).

NOTE:• Select[38400bps]orlesswhenusingtheUserSupportware.• Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 128: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

113

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SettingIDtotheProjector[CONTROLID]YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROLIDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogetherusingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.

CONTROL ID NUMBER .......Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector.CONTROL ID .......................Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID setting.

NOTE: • When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupporttheCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControlID.

Assigning or Changing the Control ID1. Turn on the projector.

2. Press the ID SET button on the remote control.

TheCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.

IftheprojectorcanbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[AC-TIVE]willbedisplayed.IftheprojectorcannotbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[INACTIVE]willbedisplayed.Tooperatetheinactiveprojector,assignthecontrolIDusedfortheprojectorbyusingthefollowingprocedure(Step3).

3. PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSET button on the remote control.

Example:

Toassign“3”,pressthe“3”buttonontheremotecontrol.

NoIDmeansthatalltheprojectorscanbeoperatedtogetherwithasingleremotecontrol.Toset“NoID”,enter“000”orpresstheCLEARbutton.

TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.4. Release the ID SET button.

TheupdatedCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.

NOTE: • TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.• Ifoneofbuttonsof theremotecontrolwithoutbatteries ispressedaccidentally,currentspecifiedIDwillbecleared.

Page 129: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

114

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TurningOnorOffRemoteSensor[REMOTESENSOR]Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK,andHDBaseT.

NOTE:• TheremotecontroloftheprojectorwillnotbeabletoreceivesignalsifthepowersupplyoftheHDBaseTtransmissiondeviceconnectedtotheprojectorisswitchedonwhenthishasbeensetto“HDBaseT”.

TIP:• Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrolsensorof

the projector, change another option.

[LENSTYPE]Dependingonthelensinstalledontheprojector,selecteither[WITHSENSOR]or[WITHOUTSENSOR].

[WITH SENSOR] .................For the lens units support the lens memory function[WITHOUT SENSOR] ..........For the lens units do not support the lens memory function.

Page 130: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

115

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[NETWORK SETTINGS]

Important:• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.• WhenusingawiredLANconnection,connectaLANcable(Ethernetcable)totheLANport(RJ-45)oftheprojector.(→ page

138)

TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection

To set up the projector for a LAN connection:Select[WIREDLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLAN.Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page116)To recall LAN settings stored in the profile number:Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page116)To connect a DHCP server:Turnon[DHCP]forwiredLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithoutusingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page116)Toreceiveerrormessagesviae-mail:Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page118)

Page 131: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

116

5. Using On-Screen Menu

WIRED LAN

PROFILES • Thesettingsforusingthebuilt-inEthernet/HDBaseTportintheprojectorcanberecordedintheprojectormemoryintwoways.• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor[DHCP]andtheotheroptions. Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.Thiswillstoreyoursettingsinmemory.• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory: Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-FILES]list. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.• Select[DISABLE]whennotconnectingtoawiredLAN

DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmasknumberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

Upto12numericcharacters

DNSCONFIGURA-TION

SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.

Upto12numericcharacters

RECONNECT Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhavechanged[PROFILES].

Page 132: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

117

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROJECTORNAME

PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

DOMAINSetahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.

HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto15alphanumericcharacters

DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

Page 133: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

118

5. Using On-Screen Menu

ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroferrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.

Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature.Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature.

Sample of a message to be sent from the projector:

Subject:[Projector]ProjectorInformationTHECOOLINGFANHASSTOPPED.[INFORMATION]PROJECTORNAME:PH1202HLSeriesLIGHTHOURSUSED:0000[H]FILTERHOURSUSED:0000[H]

HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto15alphanumericcharacters

DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

SENDER'SAD-DRESS

Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

SMTPSERVERNAME

TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

RECIPIENT'SAD-DRESS1,2,3

Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.NOTE:• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail. Should this happen, check if theRecipient’sAddress iscorrectly set.

• Unless any one of the [SENDER'SADDRESS], [SMTPSERVER'SNAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]isnot available.

• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting[TESTMAIL].

Page 134: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

119

5. Using On-Screen Menu

NETWORKSERVICE

HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumericcharacters

PJLink This option allows you to set a passwordwhen you use thePJLinkfeature.NOTE: • Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,

consult with your dealer. • WhatisPJLink? PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors

of different manufacturers. This standard protocol is established by JapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-tion(JBMIA)in2005.

TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom

the menu.

Upto32alphanumericcharacters

AMXBEACON Turnonoroff fordetection fromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.

TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrol system will recognize the device and download the appropriate DeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.

Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery.Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery.

CRESTRON ROOMVIEW:TurnonoroffwhencontrollingtheprojectorfromyourPC.CRESTRONCONTROL:Turn on or offwhen controlling theprojectorfromyourcontroller.• CONTROLLERIPADDRESS:EnteryourIPaddressofCREST-RONSERVER.• IPID:EnteryourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

Upto12numericcharacters

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

Page 135: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

120

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE OPTIONS]

SettingAutoAdjust[AUTOADJUST]ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfornoiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].

OFF ........................ The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted. You can manually optimize the computer signal.NORMAL ................ Default setting. The computer signal will be automatically adjusted. Normally select this option.FINE ....................... Select this option if fine adjustment is needed. It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-

MAL]is selected.

TIP:• Thedefaultsettingwhenshippedfromthefactoryis[NORMAL].• WhentheAUTOADJ.buttonispressed,thesame[FINE]adjustmentiscarriedout.

[COLORSYSTEM]ThisfeatureallowsyoutoselecttheTVvideosignal,whichdiffersfromcountrytocountry(NTSC,PAL,etc.).Thisissetto[AUTO]byfactorydefault.Setthisiftheprojectorcannotidentifythesignalautomatically.

SelectingDefaultSource[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

LAST ...................... Set the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on.AUTO ..................... Search for an active source in order of HDMI → DisplayPort → BNC → BNC(CV) → BNC(Y/C) → COMPUTER

→ HDBaseT → SLOT and displays the first found source.HDMI ..................... Display the digital source from the HDMI IN terminal every time the projector is turned on. DisplayPort ............ Display the digital source from the DisplayPort IN terminal every time the projector is turned on. BNC ....................... Project the input signal from the BNC input terminalBNC(CV) ................ Project the input signal from the BNC(CV) input terminal.BNC(Y/C) ............... Project the input signal from the BNC(Y/C) input terminal.COMPUTER ........... Display the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN terminal every time the projector is turned on.HDBaseT ................ Project the HDBaseT or WIRED LAN signal.SLOT ...................... Project the picture via the optional board (sold separately) inserted into the SLOT.

Page 136: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

121

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SEAMLESSSWITCHING]Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldtoswitchtothenewimagewithoutabreakduetoabsenceofasignal.

SettingClosedCaption[CLOSEDCAPTION]ThisoptionsetsseveralclosedcaptionmodesthatallowtexttobesuperimposedontheprojectedimageofVideoorS-Video.Thesubtitlesandtextwillbedisplayedashortwhileaftertheon-screenmenudisappears.

OFF ........................ This exits the closed caption mode.CAPTION 1-4 ......... Text is superimposed.TEXT 1-4 ................ Text is displayed.

SelectingaColororLogoforBackground[BACKGROUND]Usethisfeaturetodisplayablue/blackscreenorlogowhennosignalisavailable.Thedefaultbackgroundis[BLUE].

NOTE: • Evenwhenthebackgroundlogoisselected,iftwopicturesaredisplayedin[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]mode,thebluebackground

is displayed without the logo when there is no signal.

Page 137: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

122

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[POWER OPTIONS]

SelectingPower-savingin[STANDBYMODE]Settingthepowerconsumptioninthestandbymode.

NORMAL ................ In the standby mode, the power consumption of the projector is minimized.In the standby mode, the POWER indicator lights up in red while the STATUS indicator will go off.• Whensetto[NORMAL],thefollowingterminalsandfunctionswillbedisabled.HDMIOUTterminals,

Ethernet/HDBaseT port, LAN function, mail notification functionHDBaseT STANDBY .............................. Compared to [NORMAL], the power consumption in the standby mode is higher but power can be supplied

to the projector using a wired LAN.In the standby mode, the power indicator will light up in orange while the status indicator will be turned off.

Important:• When[HDBaseTSTANDBY]isselected,[AUTOPOWEROFF]willturngreyincolorandbedisabledand[0:15]willbeselected

automatically.• Inthefollowingconditions,the[STANDBYMODE]settingwillbedisabledandtheprojectorwillgointothesleepmode.Inthe

sleep mode, the fans in the projector rotate for the purpose of interior parts protection.* Sleepmodereferstothemodewherebythefunctionalrestrictionsduetothe[STANDBYMODE]settingareremoved.• When[ENABLE]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[AMXBEACON]• When[ENABLE]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[CRESTRON]→[CRESTRONCONTROL]• When[HDBaseT]isselectedunder[CONTROL]→[REMOTESENSOR]• WhenasignalisbeingreceivedfromaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice• WhentheprojectorisinHDBaseTstandbymodeconnectingtheoptionalboard(soldcommercially)totheSLOTterminaland[PROJECTORSTANDBY]for[SLOTPOWER]is[ENABLE].

• When[NORMAL]isselected,the[AUTOPOWERONSELECT]displayturnsgreyincolorandisdisabled,and[OFF]isautomati-cally selected.

NOTE:• WhenconnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevicesoldcommercially,ifthetransmissiondeviceissettotransmitremotecontrol

signals, the power consumption of the projector in the standby mode will increase.

TIP:• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• ThepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodewillnotbeincludedincalculatingCO2 emission reduction.

EnablingDirectPowerOn[DIRECTPOWERON]Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.ThiseliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.

Page 138: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

123

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TurningOntheProjectorByApplyingComputerSignal[AUTOPOWERONSELECT]Ifsetto[HDBaseTSTANDBY],theprojectorautomaticallydetectsthesynchronizingsignalinputfromthefollowingselectedterminalsandprojectsthepictureaccordingly:Computer,HDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseT,andSLOT.

OFF ........................ AUTO POWER ON SELECT function will be switch off.HDMI, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT .............................. When a computer signal of a selected input terminal is detected, the power supply of the projector will be

turned on automatically and the computer screen will be projected.

NOTE: • IfyouwanttoactivatetheAUTOPOWERONSELECTfunctionafterpoweringOFFtheprojector,interruptthesignalfromthe

input terminals or disconnect the computer cable from the projector and wait for at least 3 seconds before inputting the signal fromtheselectedterminal.WhentheprojectoristurnedoffandentersHDBaseTSTANDBYmode,butsignalsfromthecomputercontinuetobesenttheprojector,theprojectormaintainsHDBaseTSTANDBYmodeandwillnotturnONautomatically.Inaddi-tion,ifsignalsfromHDMI,DisplayPortorHDBaseTcontinuetobesenttotheprojector,dependingonthesettingsofconnectedexternaldevices,theprojectormayturnONautomaticallyevenifitispoweredoffandHDBaseTSTANDBYmodeisineffect.

• ThisfunctiondoesnotworkwhencomponentsignalscomeintoCOMPUTERINterminalorwhencomputersignalsareSynconGreenorCompositeSync.

EnablingPowerManagement[AUTOPOWEROFF]Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:0:05,0:10,0:15,0:20,0:30,1:00)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

NOTE:• ThepowerwillnotgooffautomaticallywhenasignalfromtheEthernet/HDBaseTportisbeingprojected.• [AUTOPOWEROFF]appearsingreywhenthe[STANDBYMODE]issetto[HDBaseTSTANDBY]and[0:15]willbesetautomati-

cally.

UsingOffTimer[OFFTIMER]1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00.

2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control.

3. The remaining time starts counting down.

4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.

NOTE:• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.

SettingfortheOptionalBoard[SLOTPOWER]Whenusingtheoptionalboardinstalledintheslot,setthefollowingoptions.

PROJECTOR ON .................Thisfeaturewillturnonoroffthepowertotheoptionalboard.OFF: Forcibly turn off the power to the optional board installed in the slot.ON (Default): Turn on the power to the optional board installed in the slot.

PROJECTOR STANDBY .......Thisfeaturewillautomaticallyenableordisabletheoptionalboardinstalledintheslotwhentheprojectorisinstandby.

DISABLE: Select this option to disable the optional board in the projector standby.ENABLE (Default): Select this option to enable the optional board in the projector standby.

NOTE:• Inthebelowthreeconditionsaresatisfied,thestandbymodewillgointothesleepmode. The optional board is connected InHDBaseTstandby [PROJECTORSTANDY]for[SLOTPOWER]isenable

Page 139: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

124

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Returning to Factory Default [RESET]TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)exceptthefollowing:

[CURRENTSIGNAL]Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],[AS-PECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].

[ALLDATA]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.AllitemscanberesetEXCEPT[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[ADMINISTRATORMODE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK], [SECURITY], [REF.LENSMEMORY], [COMMUNICATIONSPEED], [CONTROL ID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LIGHTHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],and[WIREDLAN].

[ALLDATA(INCLUDINGENTRYLIST)]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypresetexcept[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[ADMINISTRATORMODE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[REF.LENSMEMORY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LIGHTHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],and[WIREDLAN].Alsodeletesallthesignalsinthe[ENTRYLIST]andreturnstothefactorypreset.

NOTE:LockedsignalsinEntryListcannotbereset.

ClearingtheFilterUsageHours[CLEARFILTERHOURS]Resetsthefilterusagebacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconfirmation.Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[OFF]itemisselectedfor[FILTERMESSAGE]atthetimeofshipment.When[OFF]isselected,youdonotneedtoclearthefilterusagehour.

NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthefilterusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 140: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

125

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❼ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlightmoduleusage.Thisitemhasninepages.Theinformationincludedisasfollows:

TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.

[USAGE TIME]

[LIGHTHOURSUSED](H)[FILTERHOURSUSED](H)[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)

• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]

Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page33)

[SOURCE(1)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.

Page 141: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

126

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE(2)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE3DFORMAT

[SOURCE(3)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.

[SOURCE(4)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE3DFORMAT

Page 142: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

127

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[WIRED LAN]

IPADDRESS SUBNETMASKGATEWAY MACADDRESS

[VERSION(1)]

FIRMWARE DATASUB-CPU

[VERSION(2)]

FIRMWARE3

Page 143: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

128

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[OTHERS]

DATETIME PROJECTORNAMEMODELNO. SERIALNUMBERCONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]isset)

[CONDITIONS]

INTAKETEMPERATURE EXHAUSTTEMPERATUREATMOSPHERICPRESSURE

[HDBaseT]

SIGNALQUALITY OPERATIONMODELINKSTATUS HDMISTATUS

Page 144: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

129

❶ Connecting a computerAcomputercable,BNCcable(5-coretype),HDMIcable,oraDisplayPortcablecanbeusedtoconnecttoacomputer.Theconnectioncableisnotenclosedwiththeprojector.Pleasegetreadyasuitablecablefortheconnection.

Analog RGB signal connection

• Connectthecomputercabletothedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputerandtheCOMPUTERINterminalontheprojector.Pleaseuseacomputercableattachedwithaferritecore.

• Whenconnectingthedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputertotheBNCinputterminal,useaconversioncabletoconverttheBNCcable(5core)toaminiD-sub15pincable.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTERIN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNC BNC COMPUTER2

COMPUTER IN

BNC IN

Computercable(soldcommercially)

RGB-to-BNCcable(notsupplied)

NOTE:Pleasechecktheoperatingmanualofthe computer as the name, position and direc-tion of the terminal may differ depending on the computer.

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Page 145: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

130

6. Installation and Connections

Digital RGB signal connection

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableHDMIcablebetweenthecomputer’sHDMIoutputterminalandtheprojector’sHDMIINterminal.

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableDisplayPortcablebetweenthecomputer’sDisplayPortoutputterminalandtheprojector’sDisplayPortINterminal.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

DisplayPortIN DisplayPort DisplayPort

DisplayPort INHDMI IN

HDMIcable(notsupplied) DisplayPortcable(notsupplied)

Page 146: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

131

6. Installation and Connections

CautionswhenconnectinganHDMIcable• UseacertifiedHighSpeedHDMI®CableorHighSpeedHDMI®CablewithEthernet.

CautionswhenconnectingaDisplayPortcable• UseacertifiedDisplayPortcable.

• Dependingonthecomputer,sometimemayberequireduntiltheimageisdisplayed.

• SomeDisplayPortcables(commerciallyavailable)havelocks.

• Todisconnectthecable,pressthebuttononthetopofthecable’sterminal,thenpullthecableout.

• PowercanbesuppliedtotheconnectingdevicefromtheDisplayPortINterminal(maximumof1.65W).However,powerwillnotbesuppliedtothecomputer.

• WhensignalsfromadevicethatusesasignalconverteradapterareconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal,insomecasestheimagemaynotbedisplayed.

• WhentheHDMIoutputofacomputerisconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal,useaconverter(commerciallyavailable).

Page 147: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

132

6. Installation and Connections

CautionswhenusingaDVIsignal• WhenthecomputerhasaDVIoutputterminal,useacommerciallyavailableconvertercabletoconnectthecom-putertotheprojector’sHDMIINterminal(onlydigitalvideosignalscanbeinput).

HDMI IN

NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal• Turnoffthepowerofthecomputerandprojectorbeforeconnectingdevices.• Whenavideodeckisconnectedviaascanconverter,etc.,thedisplaymaynotbecorrectduringfast-forwardingandrewinding.• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.

• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMI.Finally,turnonyourPC. Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subterminalmayresult in no picture being displayed from the digital output of the graphics card.

• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojector isrunning.If thesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthenreconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

• TheCOMPUTERINterminalssupportWindowsPlugandPlay.TheBNCinputterminaldoesnotsupportWindowsPlugandPlay.• AMacsignaladapter(commerciallyavailable)mayberequiredtoconnectaMaccomputer. ToconnectaMaccomputerequippedwithaMiniDisplayPorttotheprojector,useacommerciallyavailableMiniDisplayPort→ DisplayPortconvertercable.

Page 148: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

133

6. Installation and Connections

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT HDMI IN

❷ Connecting an External Monitor

Asshowninthefigure,whentheprojectorisconnectedtoacomputer,thesamecontentfromtheHDMIinputsignalisdisplayedonthemonitorforconfirmation.• TheHDMIOUTterminalcannotsendanalogsignals(COMPUTERINterminal,BNCterminal).• PleaserefertoPage58whendisplayingthePIP/PBPscreen.

NOTE:• WhenoutputtingHDMIsignals,turnonthepowerofthevideodeviceontheoutputsideandkeepitconnectedbeforeinputtingvideosignalsintothisdevice.TheHDMIOUTterminalsoftheprojectorareequippedwithrepeaterfunctions.WhenadeviceisconnectedtotheHDMIOUTterminal,theresolutionoftheoutputsignalislimitedbytheresolutionsupportedbytheconnecteddevice.

• InthecaseoftheHDMIOUTterminaloftheprojector,thetheoreticalnumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedinaseriesisseven.Themaximumnumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedmaybereducedbytheexternalenvironmentandqualityofthesignalandcable,etc.ThenumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedmaydifferdependingontheHDCPversion,restrictiononthenumberofHDCPrepeatersinthesourcedeviceandthequalityofthecable.Theoverallsystemneedstobecheckedinadvancewhenbuild-ing a system.

• Whenthe[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NORMAL],videowillnotbeoutputiftheprojectorgoesintothestandbymode.Setthemodeto[HDBaseTSTANDBY],turnonthepowerofthetransmissiondeviceandkeepitinaconnectedstate.

• Whenthe[STANDBYMODE]ofthisdeviceissetto[NORMAL],HDMIsignalswillnotbeoutput.TooutputHDMIsignals,setthe[STANDBYMODE]to[HDBaseTSTANDBY],turnonthepowersupplyofthetransmissiondeviceandkeepitconnected.

• HDMIrepeaterfunctionwillnotbefunctionedifswitchingterminalsandputtingin/pullingouttheHDMIcableisperformedonthe 2nd projector and after.

HDMIcable(notsupplied) HDMIcable(notsupplied)

Page 149: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

134

6. Installation and Connections

❸ Connecting Your Blu-ray Player or Other AV EquipmentComponentvideosignal/S-videosignalconnection

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

BNC(CV) BNC(CV) VIDEO

BNC(Y/C) BNC(Y/C) S-VIDEO

CV Y C

BNC(CV)BNC(Y) BNC(C)

IfthesignalisacompositevideosignalBNCcable(notsupplied)

IfthesignalisanS-videosignalBNCcable(notsupplied)

Audioequipment

Page 150: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

135

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting Component InputConnecttheBlu-rayplayer’saudiototheaudiodevice.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTERIN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNC BNC COMPUTER2

NOTE:• Whenthesignalformatissetto[AUTO](defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped),thecomputersignalandcomponentsignalareautomatically distinguished and switched. If the signals cannot bedistinguished, select [COMPONENT]under [ADJUST]→ [VIDEO]→[SIGNALTYPE]intheon-screenmenuoftheprojector.

• ToconnecttoavideodevicewithaDterminal,usethesoldseparatelyDterminalconverteradapter(modelADP-DT1E).

COMPUTER IN

Cr CbY

15-pin-to-RCA(female)×3cableadapter(ADP-CV1E) BNC(male)-to-RCA(male)conversion

cable×3(soldcommercially)

ComponentvideoRCA×3cable(notsup-plied)

Blu-rayplayer

Audioequipment

Page 151: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

136

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting HDMI InputYoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayer,harddiskplayer,ornotebooktypePCtotheHDMIINterminalofyourprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIterminal:Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.This will provide improved image contrast and more detailed dark areas.Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.

• WhenconnectingtheHDMIINterminaloftheprojectortotheBlu-rayplayer,theprojector’svideolevelcanbemadesettingsinaccordancewiththeBlu-rayplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[ADJUST]→[VIDEO]→ [VIDEOLEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.

HDMI IN

Audiocable(notsupplied)

HDMIcable(notsupplied)UseHighSpeedHDMI®Cable.

Page 152: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

137

6. Installation and Connections

❹ Connecting a document cameraYoucanconnectadocumentcameraandprojectprinteddocuments,etc.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTERIN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNC(CV) BNC(CV) VIDEO

BNC (CV)

COMPUTER IN

VIDEO

NOTE:• Name,position,anddirectionofterminalsarevarydependingoncameramodel.Pleasecheckuser’s manual of your camera for details.

BNC(male)andRCA(male)conver-sioncable(notsupplied)

Computercable(notsupplied)

Page 153: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

138

6. Installation and Connections

❺ Connecting to a Wired LANTheprojectorcomesstandardwithaEthernet/HDBaseTport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page115).

Example of LAN connectionExampleofwiredLANconnection

Ethernet/HDBaseT

Server

Hub

LANcable(notsupplied)

NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLANcable.

Page 154: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

139

6. Installation and Connections

❻ Connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device (sold commercially)HDBaseTisaconnectionstandardforhomeappliancesthatisestablishedbytheHDBaseTAlliance.UseaLANcablesoldcommerciallytoconnecttheEthernet/HDBaseTportoftheprojector(RJ-45)toaHDBaseTtransmissiondevicesoldcommercially.TheEthernet/HDBaseTportoftheprojectorsupportsHDMIsignals(HDCP)fromtransmissiondevices,controlsignalsfromexternaldevices(serial,LAN)andremotecontrolsignals(IRcommands).

Connection example

Ethernet/HDBaseT

Computer(forcontroluse)Computer(foroutputuse)

Exampleofatransmissiondevice

Remotecontrol

HDMIoutputvideodevice

NOTE:• NeverusetheLANport(RJ-45)ontheprojectorterminalpanelforconnectingaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice.Itmaycauseof

malfunction.• Pleaseuseashieldedtwistedpair(STP)cableofCategory5eorhigherfortheLANcable(soldcommercially).• ThemaximumtransmissiondistanceovertheLANcableis100m.(themaximumdistanceis70mfora4Ksignal)• Pleasedonotuseothertransmissionequipmentbetweentheprojectorandtransmissionequipment.Thepicturequalitymaybe

deteriorated as a result.• ThisprojectorisnotguaranteedtoworkwithallHDBaseTtransmissiondevicessoldcommercially.

Page 155: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

140

6. Installation and Connections

❼ Portrait projection (vertical orientation)Ifyouinstalltheprojectorverticallyyoucanprojectscreensfromyourcomputerandothersourcesinportraitorientation.

Precautions during installation• Donotsimplysettheprojectorverticallyonthefloororonatable.Theprojectormayfallover,resultingininjury,damageormalfunction.Alsotheintakeventmaybecomeblockedcausingtheunit’sinternaltemperaturetoriseresultinginmalfunctionandriskoffire.

• Forportraitinstallationtheintakeventsmustbeinstalledatthetopandbottom.Toensureairflowtothebottomintakevent,aracktosupporttheunitisnecessary.Pleasehireaninstallationserviceprovider(forafee)tomakeacustomportraitprojectionstand.

• Wheninstalledinportraitorientationtheprojectorcanbetiltedforwardorbackward

withinarangeof±10°.Tiltingtheprojectorforwardorbackwardoutsideofthisrange,ortiltingittotheleftortotherightcouldcauseittomalfunction.

• Toensureairflow,maintain30cm/11.8"ofspacebetweentheintakeventandtheinstallationsurface.

(NOTE)Inthefiguretotherightthereisplentyofspacebehind,above,andoneithersideoftheprojectorunit.

Intakevent

Intakevent

30c

m/1

1.8"

or

grea

ter

Page 156: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

141

6. Installation and Connections

Design and manufacturing conditions for the projector standPleasehireaninstallationserviceprovider(forafee)todesignandmanufactureacustomizedstand.Pleaseensurethatthedesigncomplieswiththefollowingconditions:• Thereisoneintakeventoneithersideandoneexhaustventattherear.Theseshouldremainunobstructed.Also,secureenoughspaceforeasyfiltercoverremovalforfiltercleaning.

• Removetheleveladjustersortheprojectorhandlesincasethesehitagainstthestand.Forremovingtheleveladjuster,rotatetheleveladjusteritself,andforremovingthehandle,removethehandlefasteningscrews.

• Fixthestandontotheceilingmountscrewholes(6positions)ontheprojectorbottomface.

Dimensionsofscrewhole:forM6screwMaximumdepth10mm(Calculatetheboltlengthdependingonthestanddesign)

• Horizontaladjustmentmechanism(forexample,boltsandnutsin4places)

• Makesuretodesignthestandnotfallingovereasily.

Reference drawings* Figureillustratingthedimensionsandconditions(notactualdesignblueprint).

150 150 30014

014

0

[Side View] [Front View]

6 - M6 bolt(Unit: mm)

Horizontal adjuster

Exhaust vent

Intake vent

Intake vent

CAUTION• Whenmovingtheprojector,makesureyouhaveatleastfourpeople.Attemptingtomovetheprojectoralonecouldresultinbackpainorotherinjuries.

Page 157: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

142

7. MaintenanceThissectiondescribesthesimplemaintenanceproceduresyoushouldfollowtocleanthefilters,thelens,andthecabinet.

❶ Cleaning the FiltersTheair-filterspongekeepsdustanddirtfromgettinginsidetheprojectorandshouldbefrequentlycleaned.Ifthefilterisdirtyorclogged,yourprojectormayoverheat.

WARNING• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingflammablegastoremovedustattachedtothefilters,etc.Doingsomayresultinfires.

NOTE:Themessageforfiltercleaningwillbedisplayedforoneminuteaftertheprojectoristurnedonoroff.Whenthemessageisdisplayed,cleanthefilters.Thetimetocleanthefiltersissetto[OFF]attimeofshipment.(→ page 102)To cancel the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.

CAUTION• Beforecleaningthefilter,firstturnoffthepower,makesurethecoolingfanhascompletelystopped,thenturnoffthemainpowerswitch.Makesuretheunithascooleddowncompletelybeforecleaningthefilter.Removingthefiltercoverwhiletheunitisrunningcouldresultinburnsorelectricshockfromcontactwithinternalparts.

Theunitusesathreelayermetal-meshfilterinstalledbehindthefiltercover.Itcanbeusedrepeatedlybyperiodicalcleaning.Therearefourfiltersintotal,locatedontherightandleftsides.Cleanallfouratthesametime.

Filtercover/Filter

1. Remove the filter cover.

(1)Twisttheknobtotheleftuntilitturnswithoutresistance.

(2)Openthefiltercoverandremoveit.

• Theknobdoesnotcomeoff.

• Iftheknobwillnotturn,useaPhillipsheadscrewdriver.

1

2

Page 158: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

143

7. Maintenance

2. Undo the lock lever on the filter cover and remove it.

Ifthefiltergetscaughtonthefiltercover,pressthefiltercoverdownslightlyanditwillcomeout. A

B

3. Remove the filters.

(1)Turnthetabstotheleftpositionandslidethetopfiltertotheright.

TabTabsintherear

• If it is stuck, slowly inserting the tip of a Phillips headscrewdriverintothegapinafewplaceswillloosenit.

NOTE:• Donotapplyahighdegreeofforceorattempttopryitopen.Thiscoulddeformtheflangemakingit impossibletoreattachthefiltercover.

(2)Withthetabsstillontheleft-facingposition,removethefilterinsidebypullingittowardyou.

Allthreelayersofthefilterwillcomeout.

4. Cleanallthedustfromthefiltersusingavacuumcleaner.

Carefullyremovethedustfromthefiltercoversaswellasfrombothsidesofallthefilters.

Page 159: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

144

7. Maintenance

Removethedustfromthegratesontheoutsideoftheprojec-toraswell.

• Some intakeventsdonothavegrates.Besure toalsoremoveanydust stuck to the louver (blindwithangledhorizontalslats)withavacuumcleaner.

NOTE:• Wheneveryouvacuumthefilter,usethesoftbrushattachmenttovacuum.Thisistoavoiddamagetothefilter.

• Donotwashthefilterwithwater.Doingsocanresultindamagetothefiltermembraneandalsocauseclogging.

Thegratesontheoutsideoftheprojector

5. Putthevariouspartsofthefiltertogetherandfittheminsidethefiltercover.

Thethreelayersofthefiltermustbeassembledandinstalledinaparticularorderanddirection.Finegradefilter Mediumgradefilter Coarsegradefilter

(1)Turnthetabsonthefinegradefiltertotheleft,turnthetabson themediumgradefilter (withdiagonalcrossedmesh)totheright,thenslidethefinegradefilterintothemediumgradefilter.

Thetabsonthefinegradefilter

Thetabsonthemediumgradefilter

(2)Turnthetabslotsonthecoarsegradefiltertotheleft.Nextsetthefinegradefilterandthemediumgradefilterintotheflange,thenslidethemtotheleft.

Thetabslotsonthecoarsegradefilter

Finegradefilter Mediumgradefilter

(3)Makesurethatallsixtabsareslightlyintothetabslots,thenslowlypushthefiltertogether(somefiltershavetentabs).

• Ifthepartsofthefilterarenotcompletelyfittedtogethertheywillnotfitinsidethefiltercover.

Page 160: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

145

7. Maintenance

(4)Turn thefinegradefilterso it is facingupward,set thecutoutportionofthemediumgradefilterinsidethefiltercoveralongthedirectionindicatedbythetabs,andslowlyslidethefilterin.

Directiontabs

Cutoutportion

(5)Lockthelever,andinsertitintothelockslotonthefinegradefilter.

Lockslot

6. Fix the filter inside the projector unit.

(1)Snap thefiltercover tabs into thecutoutportionof theprojectorunittosecureit.

(2)Turntheknobtotherighttofixitinplace.

Cleantheotherintakeventairfiltersinthesameway.

1

2

NOTE:• Beforeturningonthepowermakesurethatallfiltercoversareinplace.Iftheyarenotfittedproperlydustcouldgetinsidethe

projector causing it to malfunction.• Reset[FILTERHOURSUSED]aftercleaningthefilters.Toresetgototheonscreenmenuandselect[SETUP]→[RESET]→ [CLEARFILTERHOURS].(→ page 124)

Page 161: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

146

7. Maintenance

❷ Cleaning the Protection glass• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.

• Useablowerorlenspapertocleantheprotectionglass,andbecarefulnottoscratchormartheprotectionglass.

WARNING• DonotlookintothelightsourcewhiletheprojectorisON.Stronglightisemittedfromtheprojectorandvisualimpairmentcouldresult.

• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingflammablegastoremovedustattachedontheprotectionglass,etc.Doingsomayresultinfires.

❸ Cleaning the CabinetTurnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.

Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.

• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.

• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuumcleanerintotheslitsofthecabinet.

Vacuumthedustofftheventilationslits.

• Poorventilationcausedbydustaccumulationinventilationopenings(intake,exhaust)canresultinoverheatingandmalfunction.Theseareasshouldbecleanedregularly.

• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourfingersoranyhardobjects

• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.

NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproductinprolongedcontactwithit.Otherwisethesurfacefinishwillbedeterioratedorthecoatingmaybestrippedoff.

Page 162: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

147

8. User Supportware❶ Operating Environment for User SupportwareThefollowingsoftwareprogramscanbedownloadedfromourwebsite.

Nameofsoftwareprogram Features

VirtualRemoteTool(Windowsonly)

Whenthecomputerandprojectorareconnectedusinganetwork(wiredLAN),suchoperationsasturningtheprojector’spoweronandoffandswitchingthesignalcanbeperformed.Itisalsopossibletosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthebackgroundlogo.Oncetheimageisregistered,itcanbelockedtopreventthelogofrombeingoverwritten.(→page150)

PCControlUtilityPro4PCControlUtilityPro5(forMacOS)

This isasoftwareprogramusedtooperatetheprojector fromthecomputerwhenthecomputerandtheprojectorareconnectedwithLAN.(→page153)• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.

NOTE:• ToconnecttheprojectortothenetworkbyusingtheVirtualRemoteTool,PCControlUtilityPro4,PCControlUtilityPro5,pleaseconfigurethesettingsof[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]intheon-screenmenu(→ page 115).

Download serviceFortheupdateinformationaboutthesesoftwareprograms,visitourwebsite:URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html

Operating Environment

[Windows]

SupportedOS Windows8.1,Windows8.1Pro,Windows8.1Enterprise,Windows8,Windows8Pro,Windows8EnterpriseWindows7HomeBasic,Windows7HomePremium,Windows7Professional,Windows7Ultimate,Windows7EnterpriseWindowsVistaHomeBasic,WindowsVistaHomePremium,WindowsVistaBusiness,WindowsVistaUltimate,WindowsVistaEnterpriseWindowsXPHomeEdition(32-bitversion)ServicePack3orlaterWindowsXPProfessional(32-bitversion)ServicePack3orlater

[Mac]

SupportedOS MacOSXv10.6,v10.7,v10.8,v10.9,v10.10

Page 163: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

148

8. User Supportware

❷ Installing Software Program

Installation for Windows software

ThesoftwareprogramsexceptPCControlUtilityPro5supportWindows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,WindowsVista,andWindowsXP.

NOTE:• Toinstalloruninstalleachsoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,WindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).

• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.• TorunVirtualRemoteToolorPCControlUtilityPro4onWindows8.1,Windows8,WindowsXPHomeEdition,andWindowsXPProfessional,“Microsoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0”isrequired.TheMicrosoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0,3.0or3.5isavailablefromMicrosoft’swebpage.Downloadandinstallitonyourcomputer.

1. Connectyourcomputertotheinternetandvisitourwebsite(http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html).

2. Downloadthesupportedsoftwareprogramsfrom“Download”andsavean“.exe”filetoyourcomputer.

Filenameisdifferentdependingontheversionofthesoftwareprogram.

3. Clickthe“.exe”file.

Theinstallationwillstart.

Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

TIP:

Uninstalling a Software ProgramPreparation:Exit thesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstall thesoftwareprogram, theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows8.1,Windows8,Windows7,andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministra-tor”privilege(WindowsXP).

•ForWindows8.1/Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.

TheControlPanelwindowwillbedisplayed.

2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”

The“ProgramsandFeatures”windowwillbedisplayed.

3 Selectthesoftwareprogramandclickit.

4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.

•Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.

Followtheinstructionsonthescreenstocompletetheuninstallation.

•ForWindowsXP1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.

TheControlPanelwindowwillbedisplayed.

2 Double-click“Add/RemovePrograms”.

TheAdd/RemoveProgramswindowwillbedisplayed.

3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.

Followtheinstructionsonthescreenstocompletetheuninstallation.

Page 164: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

149

8. User Supportware

Using on Mac OS

Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the computer.

1. ConnectyourcomputertotheInternetandvisitourwebsite(http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html).

2. DownloadtheupdatedPCControlUtilityPro5forMacOSfromourwebsite.

3. InFinder,control-click(“control”+click)orrightclickthePCControlUtilityPro5.pkg.

4. Select“Open”fromthetopofcontextualmenuthatappears.

5. Click“Open”inthedialogbox.Ifprompted,enteranadministratornameandpassword.

6. Click“Next”.

“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.

7. Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”andclick“Next”.

Theconfirmationwindowwillbedisplayed

8. Click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”.

Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

TIP:

•Uninstallingasoftwareprogram1. Putthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”foldertotheTrashicon.

2. PuttheconfigurationfileofPCControlUtilityPro5totheTrashicon.

• TheconfigurationfileofPCControlUtilityPro5islocatedin“/Users/<yourusername>/ApplicationData/NECProjectorUserSupportware/PCControlUtilityPro5”.

Page 165: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

150

8. User Supportware

❸ Operating the Projector Via the LAN (Virtual Remote Tool)Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviaaLANconnection.Itisalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventitfromchanging.

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremotecontroloperationonyourPC.

VirtualRemotescreen

RemoteControlWindow Toolbar

ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofVirtualRemoteTool.ForinformationonhowtouseVirtualRemoteTool,seeHelpofVirtualRemoteTool.(→page152)

NOTE:• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions: (OnlyviaserialorLANconnection)* Filesize:Within256kilobytes* Imagesize:Withintheresolutionoftheprojector* Fileformat:PNG(Fullcolor)

• Logodata(image)sentusingtheVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedinthecenterwiththesurroundingareainblack.• Toputthedefault“NEClogo”backinthebackgroundlogo,youneedtoregisteritasthebackgroundlogobyusingtheimagefile(¥Logo¥NEC_logo2012_1920x1080.png)includedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.

Page 166: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

151

8. User Supportware

Connect the projector to a LAN.ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page138)and“[NETWORKSETTINGS]”(→page115)

Start Virtual Remote Tool

Start using the shortcut icon• Double-clicktheshortcuticon on the Windows Desktop.

Start from the Start menu• Click[Start]→[AllPrograms]or[Programs]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[VirtualRemoteTool]

→[VirtualRemoteTool].

WhenVirtualRemoteToolstartsforthefirsttime,“EasySetup”windowwillbedisplayed.

The“EasySetup”featureisnotavailableonthismodel.Click“CloseEasySetup”.

Closingthe“EasySetup”windowwilldisplaythe“ProjectorList”window.

Selectyourprojectoryouwishtoconnect.ThiswilldisplaytheVirtualRemotescreen.

NOTE:• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonvianetworkconnection.

TIP:• TheVirtualRemoteToolscreen(orToolbar)canbedisplayedwithoutdisplaying“EasySetup”window. Todoso,clicktoplaceacheckmarkfor“ DonotuseEasySetupnexttime”onthescreen.

Page 167: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

152

8. User Supportware

ExitingVirtualRemoteTool1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon on the Taskbar.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

2 Click“Exit”.

TheVirtualRemoteToolwillbeclosed.

ViewingthehelpfileofVirtualRemoteTool•Displayingthehelpfileusingthetaskbar1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon onthetaskbarwhenVirtualRemoteToolisrunning.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Click“Help”.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

•DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.1. Click“Start”.“Allprograms”or“Programs”.“NECProjectorUserSupportware”.“VirtualRemoteTool”.and

then“VirtualRemoteToolHelp”inthisorder.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 168: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

153

8. User Supportware

❹ Controlling the Projector over a LAN (PC Control Utility Pro 4/Pro 5)Usingtheutilitysoftware“PCControlUtilityPro4”or“PCControlUtilityPro5”includedonthecompanionNECPro-jectorCD-ROM,theprojectorcanbecontrolledfromacomputeroveraLAN.PCControlUtilityPro4isaprogramcompatiblewithWindows.(→ nextpage)PCControlUtilityPro5isaprogramcompatiblewithMacOS.(→page155)

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,adjusting,errormessagenotification,eventschedule.

ScreenofPCControlUtilityPro4

ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.ForinformationonhowtousePCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5,seeHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.(→page154,155)

Step1:InstallPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5onthecomputer.Step2:ConnecttheprojectortoaLAN.Step3:StartPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.

TIP:• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.

Page 169: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

154

8. User Supportware

Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 4/Pro 5 on the computerReferInstallingSoftwareProgramonpage148,149.

Step 2: Connect the projector to a LAN.ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page138)and“[NETWORKSETTINGS]”(→page115)

(Using on Windows)

Step 3: Start PC Control Utility Pro 4Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→ “PCControlUtilityPro4”.

NOTE: • FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro4towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinstandby/sleepmode.Select“PowerOptions”fromthe“ControlPanel”inWindowsanddisableitsstandby/sleepmodebeforerunningthescheduler.

[Example]ForWindows7:Select“ControlPanel”→“SystemandSecurity”→“PowerOptions”→“Changewhenthecomputersleeps”→“Putthecomputertosleep”→“Never”.NOTE: • When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork(wiredLAN)

connection.

TIP:

ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4• DisplayingtheHelpfileofPCControlUtilityPro4whileitisrunning.

Click“Help(H)”→“Help(H)…”ofwindowofPCControlUtilityPro4inthisorder.

Thepop-upmenuwillbedisplayed.

• DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.

Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→ “PCControlUtilityPro4Help”.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 170: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

155

8. User Supportware

(Using on Mac OS)

Step 3: Start PC Control Utility Pro 51. OpenyourApplicationsfolderinMacOS.

2. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”folder.

3. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”icon.

PCControlUtilityPro5willstart.

NOTE: • FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro5towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinsleepmode.Select“EnergySaver”fromthe“SystemPreferences”inMacanddisableitssleepmodebeforerunningthescheduler.

• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork(wiredLAN)connection.

TIP:

ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro5•DisplayingtheHelpfileofPCControlUtilityPro5whileitisrunning.• Fromthemenubar,click“Help”→“Help”inthisorder.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

•DisplayingtheHelpusingtheDock1. Open“ApplicationFolder”inMacOS.

2. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”folder.

3. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5Help”icon.

TheHelpscreenwillbedisplayed.

Page 171: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

156

9. Appendix

❶ Throw distance and screen sizeFourseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedonthisprojector.Refertotheinformationonthispageandusealenssuitedfortheinstallationenvironment(screensizeandthrowdistance).Forinstallationandreplacementoflensunitscontactyourdealer.Eachnumberprovidedinthetablebelowmeansthethrowdistancebetweenthelenssurfaceandthescreen.

Lens types and throw distanceunit=m

Screensize LensmodelnameNP-9LS08ZM1 NP-9LS12ZM1 NP-9LS13ZM1 NP-9LS16ZM1

60" — — — —70" 1.4–2.1 — — —100" 2.0–3.0 2.8–4.0 3.1–4.9 3.8–6.3120" 2.4–3.6 3.4–4.8 3.7–5.9 4.5–7.6150" 3.0–4.5 4.2–6.0 4.7–7.4 5.7–9.5200" 4.0–6.0 5.6–8.1 6.2–9.9 7.6–12.7250" 5.0–7.5 7.0–10.1 7.8–12.4 9.5–15.9300" 6.0–9.0 8.5–12.1 9.4–14.9 11.4–19.1350" 7.0–10.6 9.9–14.2 11.0–17.4 13.3–22.3400" 8.0–12.1 11.3–16.2 12.5–19.8 15.2–25.5450" 9.0–13.6 12.7–18.2 14.1–22.4 17.1–28.9500" 10.0–15.1 14.1–20.2 15.7–24.8 19.0–31.9550" 11.1–16.6 — — —600" 12.1–18.1 — — —

TIP• Calculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensize NP-9LS08ZM1lensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.90toH×1.35:1.4m(min.)to18.1m(max.) NP-9LS12ZM1lensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.28toH×1.83:2.8m(min.)to20.2m(max.) NP-9LS13ZM1lensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.42toH×2.24:3.1m(min.)to24.8m(max.) NP-9LS16ZM1lensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.73toH×2.88:3.8m(min.)to31.9m(max.)

“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth. *Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate. Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona300"screenusingtheNP-9LS13ZM1lens: Accordingtothe“Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions”(→ page 157),H(screenwidth)=664.1cm. Thethrowdistanceis6.641cm×1.42to6.641cm×2.24=9.430cmto14.876cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

Page 172: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

157

9. Appendix

Projection range for the different lenses

100-500"

NP-9LS13ZM1 3.1–24.8 m

NP-9LS08ZM1 1.4–18.1 m

70-600"

NP-9LS12ZM1 2.8–20.2 m

NP-9LS16ZM1 3.8–31.9 m

100-500" 100-500"

Tables of screen sizes and dimensions

Screenheight

Screenwidth

16:10screensize (diagonal)

Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

60 52 132.8 29 74.770 61 155.0 34 87.2

100 87 221.4 49 124.5150 131 332.1 74 186.8200 174 442.8 98 249.1250 218 553.5 123 311.3300 261 664.1 147 373.6350 305 774.8 172 435.8400 349 885.5 196 498.1450 392 996.2 221 560.4500 436 1106.9 245 622.6550 479 1217.6 270 684.9600 523 1328.3 294 747.2

Page 173: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

158

9. Appendix

Lens shifting rangeThisprojectorisequippedwithalensshiftfunctionforadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimagebyusingtheLENSSHIFTbuttons(→page22).Thelenscanbeshiftedwithintherangeshownbelow.

NOTE: • Pleasedonotusethelensshiftfunctionwhenprojectingportraitimages.Pleaseuseitwiththelensinthecenter.

Legend:V“Vertical”referstothescreenheightandH“Horizontal”referstothescreenwidth.Thelensshiftrangeisexpressedasaratioofheightandwidth,respectively.

CompatiblelensunitsNP-9LS08ZM1,NP-9LS12ZM1,NP-9LS13ZM1,NP-9LS16ZM1

100%V

50%V20%V 20%V

20%V20%V50%V

100%H

11%H 11%H

11%H11%H

Heightofprojectedimage

Widthofprojectedimage

* Thelensshiftrangeisthesameforceilinginstallation.

(Examplecalculation)Ifprojectingona300inchscreenusinganNP-9LS13ZM1lensunitAccordingtothe“Tableofscreensizesanddimensions”(→page157),H=261.5"/664.1cm,V=147.1"/373.6cm.Adjustment range in thevertical direction: theprojected imagecanbemovedupwards0.5×147.1"/373.6cm≈ 73.6"/187cm,downwardsapproximately73.6"/187cm(whenthelensisatthecenterposition).Adjustmentrangeinthehorizontaldirection:theprojectedimagecanbemovedtotheleft0.11×261.5"/664.1cm≈28.7"/73cm,totherightapproximately28.7"/73cm.* Figuresdifferbyseveral%becausethecalculationisapproximate.

Page 174: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

159

9. Appendix

❷ Mounting the Optional Board (sold separately)CAUTIONBeforemountingorremovingtheoptionalboard,besuretoturnofftheprojector,waitforthefanstostopandturnoffthemainpowerswitch.

Toolneeded:Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)

1. Turnoffthemainpowerswitchoftheprojector.

2. LoosenthetwoscrewsontheSLOTcoveroftheterminals.

RemovethetwoscrewsandtheSLOTcover.

NOTE:Keepthetwoscrewsandtheslotcover.

3. Insert the optional board into the slot.

Makesurethattheboardisinsertedintotheslotinthecorrectorientation.

Incorrectorientationmaycausemiscommunicationbetweentheoptionalboardandprojector.

Page 175: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

160

9. Appendix

4. Tightenthetwoscrewsonbothsidesoftheslot.

• Besuretotightenthescrews.

Thiswillcompleteinstallationoftheoptionalboard.

Toselecttheoptionalboardsource,selectSLOTastheinput.

NOTE:• Mountingtheoptionalboardmaycausethefanstoruninthestandbymodeforthepurposeofcoolingdependingontheoptionalboard.Thefanspeedmayalsoincreaseinordertocooltheprojectorproperly.Bothoftheseinstancesareconsiderednormaland not a malfunction of the projector.

Page 176: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

161

9. Appendix

❸ Compatible Input Signal ListAnalog Computer Signal

Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMacSVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMacXGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMacXGA+ 1152 × 864 4 : 3 60/70/75/85

WXGA

1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601360 × 768 *2 16 : 9 601366 × 768 *2 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60/75/85SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60/75/85SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60/75WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 4 : 3 60/65/70/75WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *1 16 : 9 60MAC13" 640 × 480 4 : 3 67MAC16" 832 × 624 4 : 3 75MAC19" 1024 × 768 4 : 3 75MAC21" 1152 × 870 *3 4 : 3 75MAC23" 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 65

ComponentSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

CompositeVideo/S-VideoSignal AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

NTSC 4 : 3 60PAL 4 : 3 50PAL60 4 : 3 60SECAM 4 : 3 50

Page 177: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

162

9. Appendix

HDMISignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60

WXGA1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *2 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *1 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

4K3840 × 2160 16 : 9 23.98/24/25/29.97/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

HDMI3DSignalResolution(dots) RefreshRate(Hz) AspectRatio 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p23.98/24

16 : 9

FramePackingTopandBottom

50 SideBySide59.94/60 SideBySide

1920 × 1080i50 SideBySide

59.94/60 SideBySide

1280 × 720p

50FramePackingSideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60FramePackingSideBySideTopandBottom

Page 178: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

163

9. Appendix

DisplayPortSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60

WXGA1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *2 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *1 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

4K3840 × 2160 16 : 9 23.98/24/25/29.97/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

DisplayPort3DSignalResolution(dots) RefreshRate(Hz) AspectRatio 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p

23.98/24

16 : 9

SideBySideTopandBottom

25SideBySideTopandBottom

50SideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60SideBySideTopandBottom

1920 × 1080i50

TopandBottomSideBySide

59.94/60TopandBottomSideBySide

1280 × 720p50

SideBySideTopandBottom

59.94/60SideBySideTopandBottom

*1 Nativeresolution*2 Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[16:9]for[ASPECTRATIO].*3 Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[4:3]for[ASPECTRATIO].

• Signalsexceedingtheprojector’sresolutionarehandledwithAdvancedAccuBlend.• WithAdvancedAccuBlend,thesizeofcharactersandruledlinesmaybeunevenandcolorsmaybeblurred.• Uponshipment,theprojectorissetforsignalswithstandarddisplayresolutionsandfrequencies,butadjustmentsmayberequireddependingonthetypeofcomputer.

Page 179: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

164

9. Appendix

❹ SpecificationsModelname PH1202HL1Method 3chipDMDreflectiontypeSpecificationsofmainparts

DMDpanel Size 0.65"(aspectratio:16:9)Pixels(*1) 2,073,600(1920dots×1080lines)

Projectionlenses Zoom Powerzoom(zoomrangedependsonlens)Focus PowerfocusLensshifting Powerlensshift

Lightsource LaserDiodeOpticaldevice Opticalisolationbydichroicmirror,combiningbydichroicprism

Lightoutput(*2) (*3) 12,000lmContrastratio(*2)(allwhite/allblack) 10,000:1withdynamiccontrastScreensize(throwdistance) Pleaserefertoprojectionlensspecifications(projectionlensessoldseparately).(→

page166)Colorreproducibility 10-bitcolorprocessing(approx.1.07billioncolors)Scanningfrequency Horizontal Analog:15kHz,24to100kHz(24kHzorgreaterforRGBinputs),conformingto

VESAstandardsDigital:15kHz,24to153kHz,conformingtoVESAstandards

Vertical Analog:48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandardsDigital:24,25,30,48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandards

Mainadjustmentfunctions Powerzoom,powerfocus,powerlensshift,inputsignalswitching(HDMI/DisplayPort/BNC/BNC(CV)/BNC(Y/C)/COMPUTER/HDBaseT/SLOT),autoimageadjustment,picturemaginification,shutter,muting(video),poweron/standby,on-screendisplay/selection,etc.

Max.displayresolution(horizontal×vertical)

Analog:1920×1200(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)Digital:4096×2160(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)

InputsignalsR,G,B,H,V RGB:0.7Vp-p/75Ω

Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withNegativePolaritySync)Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩH/VSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLCompositeSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLSynconG:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Compositevideo 1.0Vp-p/75ΩS-Video Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω

C:0.286Vp-p/75ΩComponent Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩDTV:480i,480p,720p,1080i,1080p(60Hz)

576i,576p,720p,1080i,1080p(50Hz)DVD:Progressivesignal(50/60Hz)

Input/outputterminalsComputer/Com-ponent

Videoinput MiniD-Sub15-pin×1,BNCterminal×5

HDMI Videoinput HDMI®TerminaltypeA×1DeepColor(colordepth):8-/10-/12-bitcompatibleColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleLipSynccompatible,HDCPcompatible(*4),Supports4Kand3D

Videooutput RepeaterAudioinput HDMI:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bits

HDBaseT Videoinput DeepColor(colordepth):Support8/10/12bitsColorimetry:SupportRGB,YCbCr444andYCbCr422SupportLipSync,HDCP(*4),4K,3D

Audioinput Samplingfrequency:32/44.1/48kHzSamplingbit:16/20/24bit

DisplayPort Videoinput DisplayPort×1Datarate:2.7Gbps/1.62GbpsNo.lanes:1lane/2lanes/4lanesColordepth:6-bit,8-bit,10-bitColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleHDCPcompatible(*4)

Audioinput DisplayPort:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bitsBNC(CV) Videoinput BNC×1BNC(Y/C) Videoinput BNC×2USBport USBtypeA×1

Page 180: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

165

9. Appendix

Modelname PH1202HL1Ethernet/HDBaseTport RJ-45×1,SupportsBASE-TX3DSYNCoutputterminal 5V/10mA,synchronizedsignaloutputfor3Duse

ControlTerminalsRemoteterminal Stereominijack×1RS-232Cterminal(PCcontrol) D-Sub9-pin×13Dterminal D-Sub15-pin×1GPI/Oterminal D-Sub37-pin×1

Usageenvironment Operatingtemperature:5to40°C(*5)

Operatinghumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Storagetemperature:-10to50°C(*5)

Storagehumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Operatingaltitude:0to2600m/8500feet*Lightoutputvaluesometimesdropsbytheenvironmentathighlands.

Powersupply 200-240VAC,50/60HzPowercon-sumption

LIGHTMODE

NORMAL 1392WECO1 1110WECO2 752WLONGLIFE 1291W

STAND-BYMODE

NORMAL 1.83WHDBaseTSTANDBY

5.7W

Ratedinputcurrent 9.2AExternaldimensions 26.8"(width)×13.1"(height)×33.9"(depth)/680(width)×333(height)×860(depth)

mm(notincludingthelens/lenshood,handles,orotherprotrudingparts)Weight 160.9lbs/73.0kg(notincludinglens)

*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.*2 CompliancewithISO21118-2005*3 Thisisthelightoutputvaluethatresultsfromsettingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[NORMAL]andsettingthe[PRESET]to[HIGH-BRIGHT]whileusingtheNP-9LS16ZM1lens(soldseparately).

Thelightoutputvalueislowerwhensettingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[ECO1],[ECO2]or[LONGLIFE].([ECO1]:about80%,[ECO2]:about50%,[LONGLIFE]:about90%).Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.

*4 HDMI®(DeepColor,LipSync)withHDCP WhatisHDCP/HDCPtechnology? HDCPisanacronymforHigh-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection.HighbandwidthDigitalContentProtection(HDCP)isasystemforpreventingillegalcopyingofvideodatasentoveraHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterface(HDMI).

IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioningproperly.WiththeimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedisplayedduetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).

Video:DeepColor;8/10/12-bit,LipSync Audio:LPCM;upto2ch,samplerate32/44.1/48KHz,samplebit;16/20/24-bit*5 35to40°C–“Forcedecomode”• Thesespecificationsandtheproduct’sdesignaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

Foradditionalinformationvisit:US:http://www.necdisplay.com/Global:http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.htmlForinformationonouroptionalaccessories,visitourwebsiteorseeourbrochure.

Page 181: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

166

9. Appendix

Optionlens(soldseparately)

NP-9LS08ZM1 Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus,[LENSMEMORY]support(Throwratio0.90–1.35:1,F2.5/3.0,f=0.5–0.8"/13.3–19.9mm)Screensize(throwingdistance):70-600inch,1.4-18.1m

NP-9LS12ZM1 Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus,[LENSMEMORY]support(Throwratio1.27–1.82:1,F2.5/2.5,f=0.7–1.1"/18.6–26.7mm)Screensize(throwingdistance):100-500inch,2.8-20.2m

NP-9LS13ZM1 Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus,[LENSMEMORY]support(Throwratio1.41–2.23:1,F2.5/2.5,f=0.8–1.3"/20.7–32.7mm)Screensize(throwingdistance):100-500inch,3.1-24.8m

NP-9LS16ZM1 Powerlensshift,Powerzoom,Powerfocus,[LENSMEMORY]support(Throwratio1.71–2.87:1,F2.5/2.5,f=1–1.7"/25.2–42mm)Screensize(throwingdistance):100-500inch,3.8-31.9m

Page 182: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

167

9. Appendix

❺ Cabinet Dimensions

Unit:mm(inch)

680 (26.8)

744

(29.

3)

164.

5 (6

.5)

45.2 (1.8)566 (22.3)

1081

(42.

6)

860

(33.

9)

683 (26.9)

334

(13.

1)11

32.3

(44.

6)

Lenscenter

Page 183: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

168

9. Appendix

Unit:mm(inch)

150

(5.9

)15

0 (5

.9)

300

(11.

8)

140 (5.5)140 (5.5)

Figure for securing the unit with dimensions

6-M6screwMaximumdepth10mm

Page 184: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

169

9. Appendix

❻ Pin assignments and signal names of main terminalsCOMPUTER IN/ Component Input Terminal (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)

Connection and signal level of each pin

51 42 310

11 12 13 14 156 97 8

Signal LevelVideosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)Syncsignal:TTLlevel

Pin No. RGBSignal(Analog) YCbCrSignal1 Red Cr2 GreenorSynconGreen Y3 Blue Cb4 Ground5 Ground6 RedGround CrGround7 GreenGround YGround8 BlueGround CbGround9 NoConnection10 SyncSignalGround11 NoConnection12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)13 HorizontalSyncorCompositeSync14 VerticalSync15 DataClock

HDMI IN Terminal (Type A)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal1 TMDSData2+ 11 TMDSClockShield2 TMDSData2Shield 12 TMDSClock−3 TMDSData2− 13 CEC4 TMDSData1+ 14 Disconnection5 TMDSData1Shield 15 SCL6 TMDSData1− 16 SDA7 TMDSData0+ 17 DDC/CECgrounding8 TMDSData0Shield 18 +5Vpowersupply9 TMDSData0− 19 Hotplugdetection10 TMDSClock+

DisplayPort IN Terminal

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal1 Mainlinklane3− 11 Grounding02 Grounding3 12 Mainlinklane0+3 Mainlinklane3+ 13 Configuration14 Mainlinklane2− 14 Configuration25 Grounding2 15 Supplementarychannel+6 Mainlinklane2+ 16 Grounding47 Mainlinklane1− 17 Supplementarychannel−8 Grounding1 18 Hotplugdetection9 Mainlinklane1+ 19 Return

10 Mainlinklane0− 20 +3.3Vpowersupply

Page 185: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

170

9. Appendix

Ethernet/HDBaseT Port (RJ-45)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pin No. Signal1 TxD+/HDBT0+2 TxD−/HDBT0−3 RxD+/HDBT1+4 Disconnection/HDBT2+5 Disconnection/HDBT2−6 RxD−/HDBT1−7 Disconnection/HDBT3+8 Disconnection/HDBT3−

USB Port (Type A)

1

3

2

4

Pin No. Signal1 VBUS2 D−3 D+4 Grounding

RS-232C terminal (PC control) (D-Sub 9 Pin)

12345

6789

Communications protocol

Pin No. Signal1 Unused2 Transmissiondata3 Receptiondata4 Connection/Pin65 Grounding6 Connection/Pin47 Unused8 Unused9 Unused

Page 186: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

171

9. Appendix

3D connector (D-sub 15 pin)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Pin No. Signal Name I/O Function1 +12V PWR Suppliespower(+12V)tothe3Dimagesystem2 GNDC GND Ground3 GNDC GND Ground4 reserved IN5 reserved OUT6 reserved OUT7 CONN_SYNC+ OUT 3DL/Rswitchingtimingsignal(+)

(Connectstothecollectoroftheoutputtransistorofthephotocouplerinsidetheprojector)

8 reserved IN9 +12V PWR Suppliespower(+12V)tothe3Dimagesystem

10 reserved IN11 reserved IN12 reserved IN13 reserved OUT14 CONN_SYNC− OUT 3DL/Rswitchingtimingsignal(–)

(Connectstotheemitteroftheoutputtransistorofthephotocouplerinsidetheprojector)

15 N/C — Unused

Page 187: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

172

9. Appendix

GP I/O terminal (External control) (D-sub 37 pin)

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

37 26 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Pin No. Signal Name I/O1 reserved IN2 reserved IN3 reserved4 reserved5 EXT_GPIN1+(Control) IN6 EXT_GPIN2+(Control) IN7 EXT_GPIN3+(Control) IN8 EXT_GPIN4+(Control) IN9 GPOUT1+(External3DL/ROutput

Reference+)OUT

10 reserved OUT11 reserved OUT12 reserved OUT13 reserved OUT14 reserved OUT15 reserved OUT16 reserved OUT17 NC(notconnected) —18 GND PWR19 GND PWR

Pin No. Signal Name I/O20 reserved IN21 reserved IN22 reserved IN23 reserved IN24 EXT_GPIN1-(Control) IN25 EXT_GPIN2-(Control) IN26 EXT_GPIN3-(Control) IN27 EXT_GPIN4-(Control) IN28 GPOUT1-(External3DL/ROutput

Reference-)OUT

29 reserved OUT30 reserved OUT31 reserved OUT32 reserved OUT33 reserved OUT34 reserved OUT35 reserved OUT36 NC(notconnected) -37 GND PWR

Page 188: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

173

9. Appendix

Inside Projector

Voltage applied across the pins of Ext_GPIN_P and Ext_GPIN_N should be in the range from 3.3 Vdc to 10 Vdc. Recommended Operating Current: 5 mAAbsolute Maximum Rating: 23 mA

Resist = 360 Ω

Photo-couplerForward direction voltage: 1.1 V (@5 mA)

GP I/O Connector

Pin No.: 5 6 7 8

Pin No.: 24 25 26 27

Ext_GPIN_P

Ext_GPIN_N

Using GPIO ControlMomentary“ON”pulseenablesyoutocontrolprojector.Toenable“ON”pulse,holditforatleast300ms.Hold“OFF”foratleast300msbefore“ON”.(→page174)HereisfunctionlisttocontrolprojectorbyusingGPIOport.

Photo-couplerON/OFF Function8-27 7-26 6-25 5-24 The following functions apply depending on the combination of input

terminals.OFF OFF OFF ON PowerONOFF OFF ON OFF PowerOFFOFF OFF ON ON ShutterOFFOFF ON OFF OFF ShutterONOFF ON OFF ON SelectHDMIOFF ON ON OFF SelectDisplayPortOFF ON ON ON SelectBNCON OFF OFF OFF SelectBNC(CV)ON OFF OFF ON SelectBNC(Y/C)ON OFF ON OFF SelectComputerON OFF ON ON SelectHDBaseTON ON OFF OFF SelectSLOTON ON OFF ON reservedON ON ON OFF reservedON ON ON ON reserved

Exampleforturningoffthepowersource(ShutterON):InputONto6-25and5-24while8-27and7-26areOFF.

NOTE:• TheoperationcommandcomingfromGPI/Oportwillbecanceledwhentheprojectorisprocessingothertasks.• Setallotherpinsthanthoseinuseto“OFF”.• Theoperationcommandisexecuteduponcontinuousinputofthe“ON”pulseforapproximately300ms.

Page 189: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

174

9. Appendix

Timing chart of GPIO controlExampleofSelectHDMI

Off at least 300 ms at least 300 ms

approx. 300 ms

ExecuteSelect HDMI

time

5-24/7-26

6-25/8-27

on

off

on

off

Page 190: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

175

9. Appendix

❼ TroubleshootingThissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.

Indicator Messages

POWER Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Powerisoff. –

Flashing Blue(shortflashes) Preparingtoturnpoweron Waitawhile.

Blue(longflashes) Offtimer(enabled)Programtimer(offtimeenabled)

Orange(shortflashes) Projectorcooling Waitawhile.

Orange(longflashes) Programtimer(ontimeenabled) –

Lit Blue Poweron –

Red Standbymode(NORMAL) –

Orange Standbymode(HDBaseTSTANDBY) –

STATUS Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Noproblem,orSTAND-BYMODE-“HDBaseTSTANDBY”

Flashing Red(oncepercycle)

Problemwiththecover Checktomakesurethefrontcover,topcover,sidecover,andlensunitareallcorrectlyfixedinplace.

Red(3timespercycle)

Powerfailure Problemwiththepowersystem.ContacttheNECprojectorcustomersupportcentertoarrangeforrepair.

Red(4timespercycle)

Problemwiththefan Rotationofthecoolingfanhasstopped.ContacttheNECprojectorcustomersupportcentertoarrangeforrepair.

Red(6timespercycle)

Problemwiththelightsource

Problemwith the lightsourcesystem.Contact theNECprojectorcustomersupportcentertoarrangeforrepair.

Red(9timespercycle)

Hardwareproblem Problemwith the hardware.Contact theNECprojectorcustomersupportcentertoarrangeforrepair.

Lit Green STANDBYMODEinsleepmode*

Orange Buttonhasbeenpressedwhileprojectorisinkeylockmode

Theprojector’skeysarelocked.Thesettingmustbecan-celedtooperatetheprojector.(→Page28,112)

Projector’sIDnumberandremotecontrol’sIDnumberdonotmatch

CheckthecontrolIDs.(→Pages113)

* Sleepmodereferstothestatewherebythefunctionalrestrictionsduetothestandbymodesettingareremoved.

Page 191: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

176

9. Appendix

LIGHT Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Thelightmoduleisturnedoff.

Flashing Green TransitiontoswitchON/OFFthelightmodule

Lit Green Lightmodulelit –

TEMP.Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus Procedure

Off Noproblem

Flashing Red(cyclesof2)

Temperatureproblem Thetemperatureprotectorhasbeenactivated.Iftheroomtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoacoolplace.Iftheproblemstillpersists,contactanNECprojectorcus-tomersupportcenter.

Lit Orange Highsurroundingtem-perature(ForcedECOMode)

The surrounding temperature is high. Lower the roomtemperature.

SHUTTER Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus

Off Openshutter

Flashing Green [LENSCALIBRATION]inprogress

Lit Green Shutterclosed

KEYLOCKIndicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus

Off [CONTROLPANELLOCK][OFF]

Lit Orange [CONTROLPANELLOCK][ON]

If the temperature protector is activatedIftheprojector’sinternaltemperaturerisesabnormally,thelightmoduleturnsoffandthetemperatureindicatorflashes(repeatedlyincyclesof2).Itmayhappenthattheprojector’stemperatureprotectorissimultaneouslyactivatedandtheprojector’spowerturnsoff.Ifthishappens,dothefollowing:- Unplugthepowercordfromthepoweroutlet.

- Ifusinginaplacewherethesurroundingtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoadifferent,coolplace.

- Ifthereisdustintheventilationholes,clean.(→page146)

- Waitassuchabout1hourfortheprojector’sinternaltemperaturetolower.

Page 192: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

177

9. Appendix

Common Problems & Solutions(→“POWER/STATUS/LIGHT/TEMP./SHUTTER/KEYLOCKIndicator”onpage175,176.)

Problem CheckTheseItems

Does not turn onor shut down

• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol is on. (→ pages 13, 14)

• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhasoverheated.Ifthereisinsufficientventilationaroundtheprojectororiftheroom where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.

• Thelightmodulemayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGH]whenusingtheprojectorathighlands.Usingtheprojectorathighlandscan

cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. (→ page 104)

If you turn on the projector immediately after the light module is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for some time and then the projector will display the image. Wait for a moment.

• Incaseit’shardtothinkthetroubleisnotcausedontheabovementionedconditions,unplugthepowercord from the outlet. Then wait 5 minutes before plugging it in again. (→ page 26)

Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER],[AUTOPOWEROFF]or[PROGRAMTIMER]isoff.(→ page 108, 123)

No picture • Checkiftheappropriateinputisselected.(→ page 18) If there is still no picture, press the SOURCE button or one of the source buttons again.

• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 82)• Isthe[POWERONSHUTTER]intheon-screenmenusetto[CLOSE]?• Check that theSHUTTER(lensshutter), theLIGHTSOURCE,orAVMUTE (imageoff)buttonsarenot

pressed.• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 124)• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 37)• IftheHDMIINortheDisplayPortINsignalcannotbedisplayed,trythefollowing.

- Reinstall your driver for the graphics card built in your computer, or use the updated driver. For reinstalling or updating your driver, refer to the user guide accompanied with your computer or

graphics card, or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer. Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility. We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation.

• SignalsmaynotbesupporteddependingontheHDBaseTtransmissiondevice.IRandRS232Ccannotbeused in certain cases as well.

• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon the power to the notebook PC.

In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up.* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-

saver or power management software.• Seealsothepage179.

Picture suddenly becomes dark

• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.Ifthisisthecase, lower the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]. (→ page 104)

Color tone or hue is unusual

• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 104)

• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 83)

Image isn’t square to the screen

• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 20)• UsetheKeystonecorrectionfunctiontocorrectthetrapezoiddistortion.(→ page 34)

Picture is blurred • Adjustthefocus.(→ page 24)• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 20)• Ensure that thedistancebetween theprojectorandscreen iswithin theadjustment rangeof the lens.

(→ page 156)• Hasthelensbeenshiftedbyanamountexceedingtheguaranteedrange?(→ page 158)• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturned

on. Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.

Image is scrolling vertically, horizontally or both

• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported by the projector. (→ page 161)

• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 85)

Page 193: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

178

9. Appendix

Problem CheckTheseItems

Remote control does not work

• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 10)• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.• Standwithin42.21ft(15m)oftheprojector.(→ page 11)

Indicator is lit or blinking

• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LIGHT/TEMP./SHUTTER/KEYLOCKIndicator.(→ page 175, 176)

Cross color in RGB mode

• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 25)• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page

84)

Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.

Page 194: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

179

9. Appendix

If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.

• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.

BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningonthepowertothenotebookPC.

InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbeforebeingpoweredup.

NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,thismeansthereisnosignalbeingoutputfromthecomputer.(→ page 125orgotonextstep)

• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.

DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeonoroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethroughexternaldisplayselections.

• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer

IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.EachnotebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.

• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMac

WhenusingaMacwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)ac-cordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacforthechangestotakeaffect.

ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitchonaMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitchtothe13"fixedmodeandthenrestartyourMac.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemodeandthenrestarttheMacagain.

NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaMacBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub15-pin terminal.

• MirroringonaMacBook

* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”isoffonyourMacBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMaccomputerformirroring.

• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacscreen

Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApplemenuandarrangeicons.

Page 195: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

180

9. Appendix

❽ PC Control Codes and Cable ConnectionPC Control Codes

Function Code Data

POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H

POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H

INPUT SELECT HDMI 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A1H A9H

INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A6H AEH

INPUT SELECT BNC 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH

INPUT SELECT BNC(CV) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH

INPUT SELECT BNC(Y/C) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H

INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H

INPUT SELECT HDBaseT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 20H 28H

INPUT SELECT SLOT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H ABH B3H

PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H

PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H

NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.

Cable ConnectionCommunicationProtocol

Baud rate .........................................38400 bpsData length ......................................8 bitsParity ...............................................No parityStop bit ............................................One bitX on/off ............................................NoneCommunications procedure .............Full duplex

NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.

PC Control Terminal (D-SUB 9P)

NOTE1:Pins1,4,6and9arenoused.

NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.

NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.

1 52 43

6 7 98

ToGNDofPC

ToRxDofPC

ToTxDofPC

ToRTSofPC

ToCTSofPC

Page 196: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

181

9. Appendix

❾ Troubleshooting Check ListBeforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsobyreferringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblemmoreefficiently.* Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.

Frequency of occurrence □ always □sometimes(Howoften?_____________________) □ other (__________________)

Power□ No power (POWER indicator does not light blue). See also “Status

Indicator (STATUS)”.□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.□ No power even though you press and hold the POWER button.□ The main power switch is in the “ON (I)” position.

□ Shut down during operation.□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.□ [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO

POWER OFF] function).□ [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]

function).

Video and Audio□ No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the

projector.□ Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC

first, then start the PC.□ Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector.

• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysturnstheexternaldisplayon or off.

□ No image (blue or black background, no display).□ Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.□ Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu.□ Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input terminal□ A message appears on the screen.

( _____________________________________________ )□ The source connected to the projector is active and available.□ Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or

the contrast.□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the

projector.□ Image is too dark.

□ Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast.

□ Image is distorted.□ Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you

carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment).

□ Parts of the image are lost.□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST

button.□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu.□ Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.

□ Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal.

□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector.

□ Some pixels are lost.□ Image is flickering.

□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.

□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu.

□ Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal.□ Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from

[HIGH] to [AUTO].□ Image appears blurry or out of focus.

□ Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution.

□ Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.

Other□ Remote control does not work.

□ No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control.

□ Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls.

□ Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.

□ Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)□ [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in

the menu.□ Still unchanged even though you press and hold the SOURCE

button for a minimum of 10 seconds.

Page 197: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

182

9. Appendix

In the space below please describe your problem in detail.

Information on application and environment where your projector is used

Projector PC

Blu-rayplayer

Projector

Model number:Serial No.:Date of purchase:Light module operating time (hours):Eco Mode: □ OFF □ ONInformation on input signal:

Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHzVertical synch frequency [ ] HzSynch polarity H □ (+) □ (−) V □ (+) □ (−)Synch type □ Separate □ Composite □ Sync on Green

STATUS Indicator:Steady light □ Orange □ GreenFlashing light [ ] cycles

Remote control model number:

Installation environment

Screen size: inchScreen type: □ White matte □ Beads □ Polarization

□ Wide angle □ High contrastThrow distance: feet/inch/mOrientation: □ Ceiling mount □ DesktopPower outlet connection:□ Connected directly to wall outlet□ Connected to power cord extender or other (the

number of connected equipment______________)□ Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number

of connected equipment______________)

Computer

Manufacturer:

Model number:

Notebook PC □ / Desktop □

Native resolution:

Refresh rate:

Video adapter:

Other:

Videoequipment

VCR, Blu-ray player, Video camera, Video game or other

Manufacturer:

Model number:Signal cable

NECstandardorothermanufacturer’scable?Model number: Length: inch/m

Distribution amplifierModel number:

SwitcherModel number:

AdapterModel number:

Page 198: Projector PH1202HL1 - Projectors | Desktop Monitors€¦ · (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of

©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2015 7N952401


Recommended